MODEL 1088A/B

SATELLITE-CONTROLLED CLOCK

OPERATION MANUAL

ARBITER SYSTEMS, INC.

PASO ROBLES, CA 93446
U.S.A.
[Link]
ii

Description
This manual is issued for reference only, at the convenience of Arbiter Systems. Reasonable effort
was made to verify that all contents were accurate as of the time of publication. Check with Arbiter
Systems at the address below for any revisions made since the original date of publication.
Contact Information
Arbiter Systems, Inc.
1324 Vendels Circle, Suite 121
Paso Robles, CA 93446
(805) 237-3831
Website: [Link]
[Link]
[Link]

What This Manual Covers

This manual describes the set up and operation of the Model 1088A/B series satellite-controlled
clocks.
ROM Dates
This version of the manual is written for clocks having ROM dates of 3 August 2011 or later. Any
changes made in subsequent revisions which affect operation or specifications will be noted with
either (a) a new manual or (b) a revised version of this manual. To display the ROM date for your
instrument, press and release the SETUP key at powerup and the ROM date should appear briefly.
Firmware Updates
Firmware updates are available to customers by contacting Arbiter Systems at the information
given above. Where applicable, this update may include new documentation, such as a new version
of this manual.
 iii

LIMITED WARRANTY
Arbiter Systems makes no warranty, expressed or implied, on any product manufactured or
sold by Arbiter Systems except for the following limited warranty against defects in materials and
workmanship on products manufactured by Arbiter Systems.
Products manufactured by Arbiter Systems are guaranteed against defective materials and work-
manship under normal use and service from the date of delivery for the period listed as Limited
Lifetime1 . The responsibility of Arbiter Systems under this warranty is limited to repair or replace-
ment, at Arbiter Systems’ option, of any product found to be defective. Arbiter Systems shall have
no liability under this warranty unless it receives written notice of any claimed defect.
For warranty service or repair, products must be returned to a service facility designated by Arbiter
Systems. Buyer shall prepay all shipping charges to Arbiter Systems, and Arbiter Systems shall pay
shipping charges incurred in returning the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping
charges, duties and taxes for products returned to Buyer in a country other than the United States
of America.
THE WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN CONSTITUTES THE ONLY WARRANTY OBLIGA-
TIONS OF ARBITER SYSTEMS, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY, BY OPERATION
OF LAW, OR OTHERWISE. ARBITER SYSTEMS DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND BUYER EXPRESSLY
WAIVES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES.
This limited warranty does not extend to any product, which has been subject to
1. Improper use or application, abuse, or operation beyond its rated capacity, or contrary to the
instructions in the operation and maintenance manuals (if any);

2. Accident;

3. Repair or maintenance performed by Buyer, except in accordance with the operation and
maintenance manuals, if any, and any special instructions of Arbiter Systems;

4. Modification without the prior written authorization of Arbiter Systems (whether by the
substitution of non-approved parts or otherwise). The remedies provided herein are Buyer’s
sole and exclusive remedies. In no event shall Arbiter Systems be liable for direct, indirect,
incidental or consequential damages (including loss of profits), whether based on contract,
tort, or other legal theory.

FOR THE FASTEST POSSIBLE SERVICE, PLEASE PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:

1. Notify Arbiter Systems, Inc., specifying the instrument model number and serial number and
giving full details of the difficulty. Service data or instrument-return authorization will be
provided upon receipt of this information.

2. If instrument return is authorized, forward prepaid to the manufacturer. If it is determined

that the instrument is not covered by this warranty, an estimate will be made before the
repair work begins, if requested.
See Contact Information on page ii.
1
“Limited Lifetime” means that Arbiter Systems will repair or replace the defective component as long as com-
ponents are available and for no more than five years after the product has been deemed obsolete.
iv
 v

Model 1088A/B
Satellite–Controlled Clock

Operation Manual

Chapter 1 Unpacking the Clock

Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panels
Chapter 3 Connecting Inlet Power, Input and Output Signals
Chapter 4 Antenna and Cable Information
Chapter 5 Setting Internal Jumpers
Chapter 6 The Setup Menus
Chapter 7 Timing, IRIG-B and Pulses
Chapter 8 Relay Contacts and Event Inputs
Chapter 9 Serial Communications and Command Set
Chapter 10 Startup and Basic Operation
Appendix A Specifications and Technical Details
Appendix B Using Surge Arresters
Appendix C Options List
Appendix D CE Mark Certification
Appendix E Statement of Compliance
Index

Copyright Arbiter Systems Incorporated February 2016 All rights reserved. International copyright
secured.
PD0013700AF
vi
Contents

1 Unpacking the Clock 1

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Unpacking and Locating Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.4 Attaching Rack-Mount Ears to 1088A/B Series Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4.1 Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2 Front and Rear Panels 5

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Front Panel Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.1 Annunciator LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2.2 LED Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2.3 Command Key Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2.4 LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2.5 Front Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3 Rear Panel Identification and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3.1 Power Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.2 Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.3 Event Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.4 RS-232 Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.5 Form C, Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.6 Standard Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3 Connecting Inlet Power, Input and Output Signals 13

3.1 Physical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2 Standard IEC-320 Power Inlet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2.1 Cordsets and Plug Styles for IEC-320 Inlet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.2 IEC-320, Connecting Power to the 1088B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.3 Option 07, 110 to 370 Vdc Terminal Power Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.3.1 Option 07, Connecting Inlet Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.4 Option 08, 10 to 60 Vdc Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.4.1 Option 08, Connecting Inlet Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.5 Option 15A, 110 to 170 Vdc Terminal Power Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.5.1 Option 15A, Connecting Inlet Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.6 Option 15B, 110 to 300 Vdc Terminal Power Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.6.1 Option 15B, Connecting Inlet Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
viii CONTENTS

3.7 Fuse Types and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3.7.1 Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.8 Connecting Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.9 Connecting Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.9.1 Connecting an Event Input at J3 or J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

4 GPS Antenna and Cable Information 19

4.1 GPS Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.1.1 Mounting the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.1.2 Optional Antenna Mounting Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2 Verifying Antenna and Cable Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.2.1 Checking the Antenna Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.2.2 Power Supply Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.2.3 Checking the Antenna Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3 GPS Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.1 Using the GPS Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.4 Technical Details on GPS, Antennas and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.4.1 Antenna Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

5 Setting Internal Jumpers 27

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.2 Changing Hardware Settings Via Internal Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.2.1 Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.2.2 JMP1 − Event A and B Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.2.3 JMP2 − Frequency Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.2.4 JMP3 − External Reference Input Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.2.5 JMP4, JMP7, JMP10, JMP13 − Output Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.2.6 JMP5, JMP8, JMP11, JMP14 − Output Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.2.7 JMP6, JMP9, JMP12, JMP15 − Output Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.2.8 I/O Connectors Used as Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.2.9 JMP16 − Battery Backed RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.2.10 JMP17 − Output Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.2.11 I/O Connector Used as Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

6 The Setup Menus 33

6.1 Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.1.1 To Begin Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.1.2 Numeric Data Entry Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.1.3 Default Firmware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.1.4 To Exit Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.2 Setting the Main RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.2.1 Setting Serial Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.2.2 Setting the Broadcast Mode from Main RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.3 Set Local Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.3.1 Set Daylight Saving Time (DST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.4 Set Out of Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.5 Set Back Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CONTENTS ix

6.6 Set System Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

6.7 Set Programmable Pulse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.7.1 Entering Numerical Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.7.2 Prog Pulse – Seconds–Per–Pulse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.7.3 Prog Pulse – Pulse–Per–Hour Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.7.4 Prog Pulse – Pulse–Per–Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.7.5 Prog Pulse – Single Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6.7.6 Prog Pulse – Slow Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.7.7 Prog Pulse – Pulse Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.8 Set IRIG Time Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.9 Setting the Event/Deviation Modes (A or B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.9.1 Arming the Event Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.9.2 Setting The Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.10 Setting the Auto Survey Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.10.1 Number of Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.11 Set Position Hold ON or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.11.1 Edit Position Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.12 Set Option Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

7 Timing, IRIG-B and Pulses 57

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.2 Timing Output Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.2.1 Standard Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.2.2 Digital Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.2.3 Analog Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.3 Output Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.3.1 IRIG-B Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.3.2 Modulated and Unmodulated IRIG-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.3.3 IRIG-B IEEE 1344 Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.3.4 1 Pulse-per-Second (1 PPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.3.5 Programmable Pulse (PROG PULSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.4 Connecting Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.4.1 Attaching Cables to Screw Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.4.2 How Far Can I Run IRIG-B Cabling? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.4.3 Synchronizing Multiple IED’s From One Masterclock Output . . . . . . . . . 62
7.4.4 Connecting Unmodulated IRIG-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.4.5 Connecting Modulated IRIG-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.4.6 Wire Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.4.7 Voltage Matching for Modulated IRIG-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.4.8 Cable Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.4.9 Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

8 Relay Contacts and Event Inputs 65

8.1 Relay Contacts, by Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.2 Event Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.2.1 Event Timing Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
x CONTENTS

8.2.2 Event Timing Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

8.2.3 Deviation Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.2.4 Measurement Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.2.5 Event Timer Input Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.2.6 Firmware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.2.7 Displaying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.2.8 RS-232C Event Trapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.2.9 Event Trapping Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

9 Serial Communication and Command Set 69

9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
9.2 Command Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
9.2.1 Broadcast Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9.2.2 Event Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
9.2.3 Status Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
9.2.4 Local/Daylight Savings Time Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.2.5 Front Panel Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
9.2.6 IRIG-B Data Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.2.7 Position Data Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
9.2.8 Survey Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.2.9 Date and Time Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.2.10 Programmable Pulse Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
9.2.11 Antenna System Delay Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.2.12 Out-of-Lock Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.2.13 Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.3 Communication Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

10 Startup and Basic Operation 93

10.1 Initial Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.1.1 Clock Time, Startup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.2 Front Panel Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
10.2.1 Display Indication at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
10.2.2 Other Display Indications When Unlocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
10.2.3 Status Display Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10.2.4 Event/Deviation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10.2.5 IRIG-B Time Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.3 Clock Status Display Modes & Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.4 Time Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.4.1 Date and Time Display, Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) . . . . . . . . . 96
10.4.2 Time of Year Display, UTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10.4.3 Date and Time Display, Local Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10.4.4 Time of Year Display, Local Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10.4.5 Daylight Saving/Summer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
10.5 Position Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
10.5.1 Longitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
10.5.2 Latitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
CONTENTS xi

10.5.3 Elevation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

A Technical Specifications and Operating Parameters 99

A.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A.2 Receiver Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A.2.1 Input Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A.2.2 Timing Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A.2.3 Internal Oscillator, Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A.2.4 Position Accuracy (rms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A.2.5 Satellite Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
A.2.6 Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
A.3 I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
A.3.1 I/O Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
A.3.2 Standard Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
A.3.3 Input Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
A.3.4 Event Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
A.3.5 Programmable Pulse Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
A.3.6 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
A.4 Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
A.4.1 Antenna Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
A.5 Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
A.5.1 Setup Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
A.5.2 Setup Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
A.5.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
A.5.4 Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
A.5.5 Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
A.6 System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A.6.1 RS-232C Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A.6.2 Broadcast Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A.7 Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A.7.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A.7.2 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A.7.3 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
A.7.4 Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
A.7.5 Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
A.7.6 Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

B Using Surge Arresters 105

B.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B.3.1 Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B.3.2 Ground Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B.3.3 Antenna and Clock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
B.3.4 Weather Sealing the Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
B.3.5 Suggested Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
xii CONTENTS

B.4 Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

C Options List 109

C.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
C.2 Option 01: Backlighted LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
C.2.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
C.2.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
C.2.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
C.3 Option 02: GPS Battery Backup - Obsolete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
C.3.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
C.3.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
C.4 Option 03: Four Additional Outputs - Obsolete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
C.4.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
C.4.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
C.5 Option 04: Parallel BCD Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
C.5.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
C.5.2 Option 04 Firmware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
C.5.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
C.5.4 Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
C.5.5 Option 04 Connector Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
C.5.6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
C.6 Option 07: Inlet Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
C.6.1 85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz, 110 to 370 Vdc, Terminal Power Strip . . . . . . 127
C.6.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
C.7 Option 08: Inlet Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
C.7.1 10 to 60 Vdc ONLY, Terminal Power Strip, SWC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
C.7.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
C.8 Options 10: Battery Backup − Obsolete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
C.9 Option 11: Four Additional Outputs and Battery Backup − Obsolete . . . . . . . . 129
C.10 Option 12: OCXO and Four Additional Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
C.10.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
C.10.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
C.10.3 Firmware Setup for Option 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
C.10.4 Main Board Setup via Internal Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
C.10.5 Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
C.10.6 Changing Output Settings via Internal Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
C.10.7 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
C.10.8 Main Board Hardware Setup via Internal Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
C.11 Option 15A and 15B: Inlet Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
C.11.1 110–170/110–300 Vdc, 85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz Terminal Power Strip, SWC134
C.11.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
C.12 Option 17: Parallel BCD Output and Second RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
C.12.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
C.12.2 Option 17 Firmware Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
C.12.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
C.12.4 Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
CONTENTS xiii

C.12.5 Option 17 Connector Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

C.12.6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
C.13 Option 17A Second RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
C.13.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
C.13.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
C.13.3 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
C.13.4 RS-232 Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
C.13.5 Option 17A Field Installation Kit Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
C.13.6 Option 17A Firmware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
C.13.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
C.14 Option 18: IRIG-B BUS Distribution, Fault Monitor and 2nd RS-232 Port . . . . . 151
C.14.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
C.14.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
C.14.3 Discussion – IRIG-B Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
C.14.4 Option 18 Firmware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
C.14.5 Typical Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
C.14.6 Option 18 Component Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
C.14.7 Discussion - Redundant Timing Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
C.14.8 Option 18 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
C.15 Option 19: Model 1088B Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
C.15.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
C.15.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
C.15.3 Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
C.15.4 Terminal Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
C.15.5 Option 19 Firmware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
C.15.6 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
C.15.7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
C.16 Option 20A: Four Fiber Optic Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
C.17 Option 23, COMTRADE Sample Rate Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
C.17.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
C.17.2 Principles of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
C.17.3 Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
C.17.4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
C.17.5 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
C.17.6 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
C.17.7 Drive Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
C.17.8 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
C.17.9 Option 23, Front Panel Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
C.17.10Changing Hardware Settings via Internal Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
C.18 Option 27: 8-Channel High Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
C.18.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
C.18.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
C.18.3 Option Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
C.18.4 Output Load and Loop Example – Unmodulated IRIG-B . . . . . . . . . . . 177
C.18.5 Connecting Load(s) to Output Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
C.18.6 Output Loading (Modulated IRIG-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
xiv CONTENTS

C.19 Option 28: Time, Frequency and Phase Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

C.19.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
C.19.2 Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
C.19.3 System Reference Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
C.19.4 Firmware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
C.19.5 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
C.19.6 Phase Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
C.19.7 Amplitude Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
C.19.8 Option 28 Firmware Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
C.19.9 Option 28–Specific RS-232 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
C.19.10Option 28 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
C.20 Option 29: Four Additional Outputs; Dry Contacts; +25/50 Vdc . . . . . . . . . . . 190
C.20.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
C.20.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
C.20.3 Firmware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
C.20.4 Output Jumper Setting Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
C.21 Option 32/33: NTP Server – Obsoleted by Opt34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
C.21.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
C.21.2 Jumper Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
C.21.3 Firmware Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
C.21.4 General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
C.21.5 Basic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
C.21.6 NTP Server Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
C.22.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
C.22.2 Option 34 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
C.22.3 Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
C.22.4 SSH Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
C.22.5 SNMP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
C.22.6 Option 34 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
C.22.7 Time Zone Format Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
C.23 Option 36: Four Configurable Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
C.23.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
C.23.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
C.23.3 Changing Outputs via Internal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

D CE Mark Certification 251

D.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

E Statement of Compliance 253

E.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
List of Figures

1.1 Packaging of Clock and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.2 Attaching Rack-Mount Ears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.1 Model 1088B Front Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.2 Model 1088A/B Rear Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3 Standard Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.4 Option 07 Power Supply, Terminal Power Strip Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5 Option 08 Power Supply Terminal Strip Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.6 Option 15A Power Supply Terminal Strip Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.7 Option 15B Power Supply Terminal Strip Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.8 GPS Antenna Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.9 Communication Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.10 Standard Input/Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.1 IEC-320 Power Supply Inlet Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.2 Option 07 Power Supply Inlet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3 Option 08 Power Supply Inlet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.4 Option 15A Power Supply Inlet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.5 Option 15B Power Supply Inlet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

4.1 Antenna Assembly for Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4.2 Antenna Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3 Antenna Mounting with AS0044600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.4 GPS Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

5.1 Model 1088B Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

6.1 Main RS-232C Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

6.2 Serial Port Parameter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.3 Broadcast Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.4 Local Hour Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.5 Auto Daylight Saving Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.6 Out-of-Lock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.7 Back Light Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.8 System Delay Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.9 Programmable Pulse Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.10 Seconds–Per–Pulse Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
xvi LIST OF FIGURES

6.11 Pulse–Per–Hour Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

6.12 Pulse–Per–Day Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.13 Single Trigger Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6.14 Slow Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.15 Pulse Polarity Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.16 IRIG-B Time Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.17 Event/Deviation Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.18 Arming the Event Mode From Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.19 Setting the Frequency Reference From Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.20 Survey Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.21 Position Hold Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.22 Option Control Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

7.1 Rear Panel Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

7.2 IRIG-B Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

B.1 Suggested Mounting of the AS0094500 Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

C.1 Option 03 Jumper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

C.2 Option 04 Firmware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
C.3 Option 04 Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
C.4 Option 04 Output Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
C.5 Option 04 Board Layout and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
C.6 Option 07 Power Supply Inlet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
C.7 Option 08 Power Supply Terminal Strip Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
C.8 Option 12 Output Signal Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
C.9 Option 17 Firmware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
C.10 Option 17 Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
C.11 Option 17 Output Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
C.12 Option 17 Board Layout and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C.13 Option 17 RS-232 Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
C.14 Option 18 Firmware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
C.15 Option 18 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
C.16 Option 18 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
C.17 Option 19 External Wired Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
C.18 Option 19 Relay Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
C.19 Option 19 Relay Circuit without Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
C.20 Option 19 Relay Circuit with Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
C.21 Option 19 Relay Relay Board with Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
C.22 Option 20A Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
C.23 Option 23 Front Panel Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
C.24 Option 23 Internal Jumper Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
C.25 Option 27 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
C.26 Option 28 Firmware Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
C.27 Option 29 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
C.28 Option 29 Connector − Signal Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
C.29 Option 32/33 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
LIST OF FIGURES xvii

C.30 Option 32/33 Board, Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

C.31 Startup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
C.32 System Configure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
C.33 Configure HTTPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
C.34 Configure System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
C.35 Update System Firmware Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
C.36 Rebooting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
C.37 Checking Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
C.38 Configure Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
C.39 Configure VLAN Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
C.40 View Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
C.41 View SNMP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
C.42 SNMP Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
C.43 PTP Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
C.44 PTP Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
C.45 NTP Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
C.46 NTP Configure Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
C.47 NTP Authentication Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
C.48 Contact and Version Information Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
C.49 SSH Console Interface: Startup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
C.50 System Configure Page Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
C.51 Configure System Password Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
C.52 Checking Network Status Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
C.53 Configure Network Settings Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
C.54 View Operation Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
C.55 View SNMP Operation Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
C.56 PTP Status Page Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
C.57 NTP Status Page Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
C.58 NTP Configure Page Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
C.59 NTP Authentication Page Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
C.60 Contact and Version Information Pages Using SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
C.61 Option 36 Jumper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
C.62 IRIG-B Waveforms and 1 Pulse Per Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
xviii LIST OF FIGURES
List of Tables

2.1 Annunciator LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.2 Command Key Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3.1 Available IEC-320 Cordsets by Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.2 Fuse Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

4.1 Antenna Mounting Bracket Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4.2 GPS Cable Data and Accessory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

5.1 External Reference Input Frequency Settings (JMP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

5.2 Output Signal Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.3 Rear Panel I/O Connector Input Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

6.1 Front-Panel Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

6.2 Default Firmware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

7.1 Drive Current vs. Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

7.2 Available IRIG-B Time Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.3 IRIG-B Code Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

9.1 Fault Indications and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

9.2 Survey/Position-Hold Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
9.3 System Status Information Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
9.4 Unlocked Time Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
9.5 Auto Survey Setup Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.6 Option Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
9.7 Main RS-232C Port Pin Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

10.1 Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

A.1 Setup Functions Listed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

A.2 Main RS-232 Port Pin Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A.3 Temperature and Humidity List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

C.1 Option 03, Output Connector Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

C.2 Option 04 Connector Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
C.3 Option 12, Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
C.4 Option 17 Connector Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
xx LIST OF TABLES

C.5 Option 17, RS-232 Port Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

C.6 Option 20A, Four Fiber Optic Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
C.7 Option 23, Sample Rates, fLCM = 384 × fbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
C.8 Option 23, Sample Rates, fLCM = 3200 × fbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
C.9 Option 23, Output Signal Selection Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
C.10 Example, Output Load and Loop Distance Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
C.11 Option 28 B2 Broadcast, Time Deviation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
C.12 Option 29, Operating Modes of SSR Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
C.13 Option 29, Output Connectors and Setup Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
C.14 Option 32/33 Jumper Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
C.15 Null-Modem Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
C.16 Option 34 LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
C.17 Partial List of POSIX Time Zone Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
C.18 Option 36 Output Connector Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Chapter 1

Unpacking the Clock

1.1 Introduction
This section will assist you with unpacking the clock from its shipping container; other parts and
accessories shipped with the clock include:

• 1088A/B GPS Clock (includes internal power supply)

• Antenna Cable, 50 feet with connectors

• GPS Antenna

• Rack-Mount Ears, 2 ea.

• Instrument Manual

1.2 Precautions
Mechanical Shock Note that the GPS antenna is small and smooth, and can be damaged if
dropped. Use care when handling. Remember to store the antenna in a safe place before the final
installation.
Static Discharge Note that the Model 1088A/B series clocks are electronic devices and use
static-sensitive components in their operation. Therefore, use care when handling against static
discharges. Generally, these components are protected in their normal situation, however some of
these are accessible when the cover is removed.
CAUTION Antenna Input Connector - Connect only the antenna cable coming from the antenna
into this connector. The antenna input connector on the clock itself leads to the GPS receiver,
which could be damaged from high voltage or a static discharge.

1.3 Unpacking and Locating Accessories

The Model 1088A/B series clocks, and included accessories, are packed between two closed-cell
foam shells. Carefully pull apart the two shells to extract the clock and accessories. Some of the
2 Unpacking the Clock

accessories (i.e. antenna and rack-mount ears) are located in one of these shells for protection.
In the diagram below, you can see how the GPS antenna and rack-mount ears are located in the
closed-cell foam marked with the label that reads,
ADDITIONAL PARTS INSIDE

Figure 1.1: Packaging of Clock and Accessories

Antenna cable, clock and operation manual are located between the two pieces of closed-cell foam.
The rack-mount ears and antenna are embedded in the packing foam side labeled ADDITIONAL
PARTS INSIDE.

1.4 Attaching Rack-Mount Ears to 1088A/B Series Clocks

Each Model 1088A/B comes with two rack-mount ears suitable for mounting in a 19-inch system
rack. These ears have four mounting holes, two of which are used to attach them to the sides of the
clock. Since it is required to remove the M25 screws which attach the cover to the chassis, it may
be good to attach the ears after first making any jumper configuration inside the clock. You will
want to return to this section after making these changes. See Chapter 5, Setting Internal Jumpers,
for information on configuring input/output signals.

1.4.1 Mounting Instructions

1. Using a Torx T25 driver or large slot screwdriver, remove the four M25 screws attaching the
clock cover to the chassis. Use either a T-25 or large slot screwdriver.

2. With the ear facing out from the front panel, match the lower set of holes of the ear to the
cover/chassis and remount the M25 screws.

3. Repeat this procedure with the other side of the chassis and other ear.
1.4 Attaching Rack-Mount Ears to 1088A/B Series Clocks 3

Figure 1.2: Attaching Rack-Mount Ears

4 Unpacking the Clock
Chapter 2

Front and Rear Panels

2.1 Introduction
This section identifies the connectors, controls, and displays found on the front and rear panels of
the 1088A/B series clocks. The Model 1088B replaced the Model 1088A. Take care to review all
of these items prior to connecting cables to and configuring these products.

2.2 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

The front panel of the Model 1088A and 1088B are the same except the 1088A does not have the
indicator LEDs or optional internal battery switch.
The Model 1088B has seven annunciator LED’s, two-line by twenty-character LCD, eight-button
keypad, ON/OFF switch, the battery power option switch is optional. The upper row of keys are
information keys and the lower row of keys are configuration keys. In the figure below are illustrated
the front panels of all of these clocks, illustrating all of the indicators and controls.

Figure 2.1: Model 1088B Front Panel Description

Definitions for the annunciator LEDs are found in Table 2.1 and definitions for keys in Table 2.2.
Each key of the upper row of keys allows you to view clock information, like time and date,
geographical position and instrument status. Each of the lower row of keys have specific and
alternate functions for configuring operation. To configure, see Chapter 6, The Setup Menus.
6 Front and Rear Panels

2.2.1 Annunciator LED Definitions

Annunciator LED Color Purpose

Operate Green Clock Operating
Charge* Green Illuminates when the charging circuit for
the internal battery is in the high charge
mode.
In Use* Green Illuminates when the power is supplied by
backup battery.
Lo Battery* Red Illuminates when the battery voltage falls
below 5.6 volts.
On Line Green Indicates Active Clock**
Unlocked Red Out-of-Lock when ON
Fault Red Internal/External Faults***

Table 2.1: Annunciator LED Definitions

* Only active with clock power backup battery. Refer to the option information sheet for details
about the internal battery operation.
** When used with Option 18, Redundant Interface, the On Line LED indicates which of the two
interconnected clocks is active.
*** Illuminates when a fault condition exists with the clock or GPS receiver. See Section 10.3.

2.2.2 LED Status Indicators

Four LED’s provide information about the operational status of the instrument. The Operate and
On Line LEDs are green and the Out-of-Lock and Fault LEDs are red. For normal operation, with
the clock locked and accurate, the two green LEDs should be ON and the two red LEDs should be
OFF.
Three LED’s provide information about the clock power backup battery. The Charge and In Use
LEDs are green and the Lo Battery LED is red.
The following definitions apply to these indicators:

• OPERATE: Indicates that power is being supplied to the clock.

• CHARGE: Indicates that the charging circuit for the internal battery is in the high charge
mode. Whenever power is present at the rear-panel power inlet, the charging circuit will
provide a trickle charge. If the battery charge level falls below a preset threshold, the high
charge mode will be activated.

• IN USE: Indicates that the internal battery is supplying power to the clock.

• LO BATTERY: Indicates the backup battery voltage falls below 5.6 volts.
2.2 Front Panel Controls and Indicators 7

• ON LINE: Indicates the active clock, especially when using the Option 18, Redundant
Interface, when two clocks are interconnected.

• OUT OF LOCK: Illuminates when the clock has not yet synchronized, or has lost synchro-
nization, with the GPS.

• FAULT: Indicates when a GPS receiver or clock fault occurs. See Table 10.1 for list of fault
conditions.

2.2.3 Command Key Definitions

Table 2.2 subdivides all of the functions of the eight keys by name and function. Some of the keys
have alternate functions as well.

Key Function Alternate Function

TIME time and date NA
POSITION view latitude, longitude and NA
elevation
EVENT or DEVIATION view event or deviation NA
STATUS view clock and receiver status NA
SETUP enter setup mode move cursor left in data entry
mode
UP select upper value increase numerical value
DOWN select lower value decrease numerical value
ENTER install selected value move cursor right in data en-
try mode

Table 2.2: Command Key Definitions

2.2.4 LCD Display

The Model 1088A/B series clocks contain a liquid crystal display (LCD), which provides a
20-character by 2-line readout. The readout displays instrument status, time, position and
event/deviation data. The readout is also used to display the current configuration of operation
parameters.

2.2.5 Front Panel Keys

View various functions using the four upper keys, and configure of operational parameters using
the four lower keys on the front panel. However, using an RS-232 command, you can control the
operation of the keypad and display (lock, enable, blank). Refer to Section 9.2.5, in the Serial
Communication and Command Set, for a detailed description of RS-232 commands to control the
front panel. The front-panel pushbutton keys are described below.
8 Front and Rear Panels

Time
Sets the display to the Time Display Mode. There are four modes of the time display available and
repeated pressing of this key will cause the display to scroll through all four modes. Changing the
time display has no effect on the time data, which is output from rear-panel timing outputs.
Position
Cycles the display through the longitude, latitude, and elevation data readouts of the antenna
location according to the most recent, or averaged, position fix.
Event/Deviation
Selects Event and/or Deviation Data recorded by the specific Model clock; up to 200 event records
for each channel (A and B) or updated 1-PPS deviation data. For additional information, see Event
Inputs in Chapters 5, 6, 8 and 9.
Status
Toggles the display between four status display modes: Clock, Receiver, DXCO and EEPROM,
including the display of GPS satellite acquisition and synchronization.
Setup
Invokes a series of menus used to adjust configurable parameters within the clock. In numeric data
entry mode, moves the cursor to the left.
Up
Used in conjunction with the Setup menus to adjust values upward, or to scroll upward through
the available menu choices. Also assists in navigating through main Setup menus in normal order.
Down
Used in conjunction with the Setup menus to adjust values downward, or to scroll downward
through available menu choices. Also assists in navigating through main Setup menus in reverse.
Enter
Used for confirming changes made within Setup menus. Generally, pressing Enter also advances to
the next parameter, or returns to the previous menu level. In numeric data entry mode, moves the
cursor to the right.

2.3 Rear Panel Identification and Connectors

This section contains information to assist you in identifying where to connect inlet power, the
GPS antenna cable and all of the input and output cables on the Model 1088A/B series clocks.

Figure 2.2: Model 1088A/B Rear Panel Description

2.3 Rear Panel Identification and Connectors 9

2.3.1 Power Inlet

To cover all of the possible inlet power conditions, the Model 1088B has three optional power
supplies. Please examine the paperwork you received, to make sure you have correctly identified
the inlet connection. Supply types are listed below:

• Standard, IEC-320 supply with a range of 85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz and 110 to 370 Vdc

Figure 2.3: Standard Power Supply

• Option 07, Terminal Power Strip with a range of 85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz and 110 to 370
Vdc

Figure 2.4: Option 07 Power Supply, Termi-

nal Power Strip Connector

• Option 08, 10 to 60 Vdc ONLY, Terminal Power Strip. BE SURE TO OBSERVE COR-
RECT POLARITY, as the power supply used with Option 08 will not accept reverse input
polarity.

Figure 2.5: Option 08 Power Supply Termi-

nal Strip Connector

• Option 15A, 125 Vdc Terminal Power Strip with Surge Withstand Protect Circuitry (SWC)
10 Front and Rear Panels

Figure 2.6: Option 15A Power Supply Ter-

minal Strip Connector

• Option 15B, 250 Vdc Terminal Power Strip with Surge Withstand Protect Circuitry (SWC)

Figure 2.7: Option 15B Power Supply Ter-

minal Strip Connector

2.3.2 Antenna Input

The Model 1088A/B provides a type-F, GPS antenna input connector not only as the connection
point for GPS signal, but also supplies 5 volts to energize the antenna. It is equipped with a
threaded, type-F female connector.
Shown below is a diagram of the antenna connector. To check for this signal, use a small multimeter
and probe from the center pin of the connector to the threads. Voltage range is 4.9 to 5.1 Vdc. For
further information, see Chapter 4, Antenna and Cable Information.

Figure 2.8: GPS Antenna Connector

2.3.3 Event Input

For timing external events based on the GPS-synchronized time, use the Event Input function with
two separate connectors: J3 Event B input (Standard I/O) and J4 Event A input (Standard I/O).
See Figure 5.1, which illustrates the location of these connectors and jumpers.

2.3.4 RS-232 Communication Ports

The Model 1088A/B has one standard and one optional communication port. Generally, for RS-
232 communications, you will only need pins 2, 3 and 5 using a null-modem cable. For more
information, see Chapter 9, Serial Communications and Command Set.
2.3 Rear Panel Identification and Connectors 11

Figure 2.9: Communication Port Connector

2.3.5 Form C, Relay Contacts

The Model 1088A/B can be fitted with dry contacts by installing an internal option board in
option Slot B. Using Option 19, the 1088B can have one set of Form C mechanical contacts. With
Option 29, the 1088B can have two solid-state contacts that can also source +25 or +50 Vdc. For
additional information on these two options, see Section C.15, for Option 29, see Section C.20.

2.3.6 Standard Inputs/Outputs

The Model 1088B has four BNC connectors used for configurable inputs and outputs, the functions
of which are based on setting internal jumpers. The factory sets these jumpers at the time of
purchase, and they may be changed at any time as required. As outputs, all connectors may be
set to one of twenty-two different signals, and as inputs, two may be set as an event inputs, one
as auxiliary input and one set to function as an external timing reference. The connector labels
reflect the original setting from the factory.

Figure 2.10: Standard Input/Output Con-

nectors
12 Front and Rear Panels
Chapter 3

Connecting Inlet Power, Input and

Output Signals

3.1 Physical Configuration

The Model 1088B Satellite-Controlled Clock is designed for operation in an environment having
an ambient temperature range of 0◦ to 50◦ C (32◦ to 122◦ F). No external ventilation is necessary.
Operation is possible at temperatures of -20◦ to +65◦ C, although operation of the LCD display
will be degraded. Normal operation will be restored once the temperature has returned to the
specified range.
Allow adequate clearance for rear-panel connections, especially in rack-mounting situations. Ad-
equate clearance reduces the possibility of damage to the connectors, cables, or the instrument.
Ideally, the clock should be located close enough to the antenna location so that the standard
15-meter (50-foot) cable can be used. The loss and delay characteristics of the cable are important
factors in the calibration and accuracy of the instrument (refer to Section 4.4.1); thus, the entire
cable length should be used, with any excess coiled up and placed out of the way.
Arbiter Systems offers standard accessories allowing the antenna to be mounted up to 240 m (800
ft) from the clock if longer cable runs are required. These are described in Table 4.2. If a longer
antenna cable than this is required, please contact the factory for advice.

Model 1088B Power Supplies

To provide for a wide range of inlet power sources, the 1088B can be ordered with three different
power inlet modules. Each of the power inlet module connectors are illustrated here and also in
Chapter 2. Take time to examine the power inlet module connection on your clock to verify that
it is correct according to your order. Make sure to check the inlet voltage range before connecting
power to the clock.

3.2 Standard IEC-320 Power Inlet Module

The standard IEC-320 power inlet module has a “computer type” power connector with power cord
for the required country code. Voltage and system frequency are given below with an outline of
the connector. Input voltages are 85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz, or 110 to 370 Vdc, < 20 Watts.
14 Connecting Inlet Power, Input and Output Signals

Figure 3.1: IEC-320 Power Supply Inlet De-

scription

3.2.1 Cordsets and Plug Styles for IEC-320 Inlet Module

Make sure that the cordset matches the wall connector for your country. The following are available
IEC-320 mating cordset plug style and specifications:

No. Country Specification Rating

P01 Continental Europe CEE 7/7 220V
P02 Australia, NZ, PRC AS3112-1981 240V
P03 U.K. BS 1363 240V
P04 Denmark Afsnit 107-2-01 240V
P05 India BS 546 220V
P06 Israel SI 32 220V
P07 Italy CEI 23-16/VII 1971 220V
P08 Switzerland SEV 1011.1959 220V
P09 North America and ROC NEMA 5-15P CSA C22.2#42 120V
P10 Japan JIS8303 120V

Table 3.1: Available IEC-320 Cordsets by Country

3.2.2 IEC-320, Connecting Power to the 1088B

Connect the IEC-320 plug to the IEC-320 connector on the 1088B, and then connect the wall plug
into the wall socket.

3.3 Option 07, 110 to 370 Vdc Terminal Power Strip

This option replaces the standard IEC-320 inlet with a 3-pole terminal strip. Input voltages are:
85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz, or 110 to 370 Vdc, < 20 VA typical.

3.3.1 Option 07, Connecting Inlet Power

When wiring this power supply, make sure to first connect an earth ground wire to the terminal strip
connector labeled ”G” (for ground). Positive and negative terminals are marked on the terminals
3.4 Option 08, 10 to 60 Vdc Power 15

Figure 3.2: Option 07 Power Supply Inlet

Connector

as “+” and “−.” After connecting a ground wire, connect the positive and negative leads from the
station batteries to the corresponding Option 07 terminals.

3.4 Option 08, 10 to 60 Vdc Power

This option replaces the standard power supply with one accepting 10 to 60 Vdc (DC only), <
20 Watts typical. Replaces the standard IEC-320 inlet with a 3-pole terminal strip. Option 08
operates from common low-voltage battery systems, including 12, 24, and 48 Vdc.

Figure 3.3: Option 08 Power Supply Inlet

Connector

3.4.1 Option 08, Connecting Inlet Power

When wiring station batteries to this power supply, make sure to first connect an earth ground
wire to the terminal strip connector labeled ”G” (for ground). After connecting a ground wire,
connect the positive and negative leads from the station batteries to the corresponding Option 08
terminals. Be sure to observe the correct polarity, as the power supply used with the Option 08
will not accept reverse input polarity. CAUTION: DO NOT connect Option 08 module to any ac
voltage source.

3.5 Option 15A, 110 to 170 Vdc Terminal Power Strip

Option 15A for the Model 1088A/B is designed to provide power inlet surge withstand capability
in compliance with ANSI C37.90-1 and IEC 801-4. Option 15A also incorporates Option 07, which
is a three-pole barrier strip inlet for 125 volt DC substation power.

3.5.1 Option 15A, Connecting Inlet Power

When wiring this power supply, make sure to first connect an earth ground wire to the terminal strip
connector labeled ”G” (for ground). Positive and negative terminals are marked on the terminals
as “+” and “−.” After connecting a ground wire, connect the positive and negative leads from the
station batteries to the corresponding Option 07 terminals.
16 Connecting Inlet Power, Input and Output Signals

Figure 3.4: Option 15A Power Supply Inlet

Connector

3.6 Option 15B, 110 to 300 Vdc Terminal Power Strip

Option 15B for the Model 1088A/B is designed to provide power inlet surge withstand capability
in compliance with ANSI C37.90-1 and IEC 801-4. Option 15B also incorporates Option 07, which
is a three-pole barrier strip inlet for 250 volt DC substation power.

Figure 3.5: Option 15B Power Supply Inlet

Connector

3.6.1 Option 15B, Connecting Inlet Power

When wiring this power supply, make sure to first connect an earth ground wire to the terminal strip
connector labeled ”G” (for ground). Positive and negative terminals are marked on the terminals
as “+” and “−.” After connecting a ground wire, connect the positive and negative leads from the
station batteries to the corresponding Option 07 terminals.

3.7 Fuse Types and Locations

Use the fusing table below for identifying the correct fuse for your option power supply.

PS Option Arbiter PN Fuse ID Size, mm

Standard FU0001816 F1AL250V 5 x 20
07 FU0001816 F1AL250V 5 x 20
08 FU0001419 T2AL250V 5 x 20
15A/15B FU0001816 F1AL250V 5 x 20

Table 3.2: Fuse Chart

3.8 Connecting Output Signals 17

3.7.1 Replacing Fuses

An IEC-320 power inlet connector includes a 1-A, 250-V fast acting fuse. The fuse is contained in
a small compartment with a snap-fit latch, which also has a compartment for a spare fuse. The
fuse compartment is located directly adjacent to the input connector socket, and can be opened by
pulling both sides directly out away from the chassis, or by gently prying with a small flag-blade
screwdriver. Check Table 3.2 for replacement fuse information.
To replace the fuse, first disconnect the line cord from the power source and then remove the cord
from the rear-panel IEC connector. The in-circuit fuse is the innermost one; inspect it to deterrmine
if it is open. As required, replace with fuse in the outer compartment, and replace the spent fuse.
With an Option 07, 08 or 15A/15B, the input power module includes separate fuse holder adjacent
to the terminal power strip. To check the fuse, first disconnect power to the clock. Grasp the
fuse-holder cover and turn it counter-clockwise. The cover and fuse should pop out. CAUTION:
Replace fuse only with another of the same type and rating. See Table 3.2 above for the correct
fuse configured for your option.

3.8 Connecting Output Signals

Output signals may be connected through designated standard BNC or option connector. For
standard I/O connectors, see Section 2.3.6. Connectors are standard female BNC. For Options
that have terminals for output connectors, see Appendix C for details about those options and
connectors. As an example, the Option 27 uses Phoenix-style terminals with 5-mm spacing and
will accept between 0.25 and 2.5–mm wire diameter. BNC connectors (on installed option boards)
are female and require only connecting the (male) connector into it. For technical details concerning
the various timing signals, see Chapter 7.

3.9 Connecting Input Signals

Input signals may be connected through the designated I/O terminals, J2, J3, J4, and J5. J2 is used
for auxiliary inputs, J3 and J4 are both used for timing events and J5 can be used to connect an
external timing reference, instead of using the internal oscillator. For standard I/O connectors, see
Section 2.3.6. BNC connectors (on installed option boards) are female and require only connecting
the (male) connector into it.

3.9.1 Connecting an Event Input at J3 or J4

An event input may be connected to the Model 1088B series clock through two I/O connectors: J3
(Event B) and J4 (Event A). Refer to the rear-panel drawing in Figure 2.2.
18 Connecting Inlet Power, Input and Output Signals
Chapter 4

GPS Antenna and Cable Information

The standard Model 1088B comes complete with the necessary hardware to be able to receive GPS
signals: 50-feet of RG-6 cable and a GPS antenna. The antenna cable is connected between the
female F connector on the antenna and the female F connector at the rear panel of the clock.
This section should help you with installing the GPS antenna and antenna cable(s) to the Model
1088B clock. It should also be a source of information if you should need to trouble shoot the
antenna-cable system. These clocks achieve their accuracy by comparing and adjusting the internal
clock signal to the incoming GPS signal.

4.1 GPS Antenna Installation

To properly receive GPS signals, the GPS antenna needs to be mounted clear of buildings and
surrounding elements that would block the GPS signals being transmitted by the satellites. For
complete coverage, the antenna needs to have a clear view of the sky from 10 degrees above the
horizon to directly overhead for all points of the compass. Minimal installations, where the antenna
is mounted in a less favorable location, may work however reception may be somewhat limited
during certain hours of the day.

4.1.1 Mounting the Antenna

The standard antenna is designed for pole mounting on a 26-mm pole (1.05-in. OD or 3/4-in. ID
pipe), with either a standard 1-in. – 14 (approximately M25.4 x 1.81) marine-mount thread or a
3/4-in. NPT pipe thread. The Type F connector on the inside of the antenna is protected from
direct exposure to the elements when the antenna is mounted in this way. This will extend the
operational life of the antenna-to-cable interface.
To mount the antenna, you will need a short piece of grey, 3/4” plastic pipe nipple that can
be attached to a solid fixture. The piece of pipe nipple should be threaded up into the antenna
receptacle after connecting the antenna cable to the Type F cable adapter. Arbiter Systems sells
an antenna mounting kit (P/N AS0044600) that simplifies installation, and is illustrated in Fig-
ures 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3.
20 GPS Antenna and Cable Information

Figure 4.1: Antenna Assembly for Mounting

Antenna mounting procedure:

1. Thread the RG-6 antenna cable through the plastic pipe.

2. Tighten the Type F male connector to the female connector on the antenna. WARNING!
Do not spin the antenna onto cable. Attach and tighten using cable nut.
3. Thread the plastic pipe into the antenna.
4. Mount the plastic pipe and antenna/cable assembly to a fixture.

4.1.2 Optional Antenna Mounting Kit

The Antenna Mounting Kit (P/N AS0044600) is designed specifically for use with antennas shipped
with Arbiter Systems GPS-controlled clocks. The hardware included with the bracket allows in-
stallation of the antenna on a mast or pipe up to about 2 inches in diameter, and a different clamp
may be substituted for use with a larger diameter pipe. All metallic hardware is stainless steel.
Also, the bracket can be mounted to a wall, a roof, or any other flat surface.
For complete details, request document number PD0024700, Installation Instructions for Arbiter
Systems GPS Antenna Mounting Bracket.

Qty Description ASI P/N

1 GPS antenna mounting bracket HD0052700
1 U-bolt, 1-1/8”, with 2 hex nuts HP0014700
1 3/4” x 4” threaded pipe, PVC, schedule 80 HP0014804
1 Hose clamp, worm drive HP0014900
1 Mounting bracket stabilizer HD0054200

Table 4.1: Antenna Mounting Bracket Parts List

Figure 4.2 and 4.3 on page 21 illustrate the antenna mounting bracket and a typical installation
using the AS0044600 Antenna Mounting Kit.
4.1 GPS Antenna Installation 21

Figure 4.2: Antenna Mounting Bracket

Figure 4.3: Antenna Mounting with AS0044600

22 GPS Antenna and Cable Information

4.2 Verifying Antenna and Cable Operation

A two-color operate LED, located at the base of the antenna, indicates proper antenna operation.
GREEN indicates proper operation (i.e. the antenna is getting the correct voltage); AMBER
indicates improper operation (i.e. the voltage is low).

4.2.1 Checking the Antenna Voltage

The GPS clock provides +5 Vdc to the GPS antenna, which is carried through the antenna cable.
Nominal antenna current is 13 mA (old style antennas are approximately 20 mA). Check the voltage
at the antenna connector on the rear panel. Without the signal, the antenna and the GPS clock
will not synchronize with the Global Positioning System and can generate an out-of-lock alarm, if
the Out-of-Lock feature is enabled.

4.2.2 Power Supply Check

The Antenna Voltage test (above) actually tests the main power supply voltage for all models of
clocks. This signal should be between 4.9 and 5.1 Vdc.

4.2.3 Checking the Antenna Resistance

Checking the internal resistance of the Arbiter GPS antenna is not as useful as verifying the antenna
operation mentioned above. Antenna resistance measures several megohms with meter probes at
one polarity and less so if you change the meter probe polarity (older style antennas can measure
3.8 kohms or 270 ohms).

4.3 GPS Surge Arrester

Figure 4.4 illustrates the GPS surge arrester kit (P/N AS0094500), which is mounted in line with
the antenna cable. The surge suppressor has two female F connectors, which are bidirectional, and
two ground lugs with hardware for connecting to a solid ground.

Surge Arrester/Grounding Block

AS0094500A

Figure 4.4: GPS Surge Arrester Receiver Antenna

4.3.1 Using the GPS Surge Arrester

Before installation, review the documentation on this device found in Appendix B. The AS0094500
surge arrester is weatherproof except for the F connectors, which may be sealed with rubber port
seals or GE Silicone II compound.
4.4 Technical Details on GPS, Antennas and Cables 23

4.4 Technical Details on GPS, Antennas and Cables

4.4.1 Antenna Cable
Length and Loss Considerations

Standard Antenna Cable

The standard antenna cable assembly included with the clock is constructed using a 15-meter
(50-foot) length of RG-6 type low-loss coaxial cable, terminated with male Type F connectors.
Optional lengths of RG-6 coax are separately available for longer runs; see Table 4.2, Cable Data
and Accessory Information.

Effects of Cable Parameters

To receive GPS signals and properly operate the clock, the type and length of the cable are impor-
tant. Due to their effect on specific parameters described in the following paragraphs, any changes
to the length and/or type of antenna cable should be made carefully. Damaged cables may also
affect performance.

Cable Delay

The velocity factor and the physical length of the cable determine cable delay. During the initial
factory calibration of the clock, a value for cable delay (based upon the length and type of cable
supplied) is entered into the clock memory. Firmware uses this figure to counteract the effect that
the delay has upon GPS timing accuracy. The value entered for a standard 15-meter cable is 60
nanoseconds. For other cable options, the delay is tabulated below. The formula for calculating
cable delay is:

1
(4.1) T =λ + 1ns
CKv
Where:

T = Cable delay, in nanoseconds;

λ = Cable length, in meters;
C = Speed of light (3 × 108 meters per second);
Kv = Nominal velocity of propagation (0.85).

One nanosecond is added to the calculated value to account for the length and velocity factor of
the short connecting cable inside of the clock.

Attenuation

Attenuation depends upon the cable length, and the loss per unit length. The total attenuation
must be limited to 21 dB (maximum) at the GPS L1 frequency of 1575.42 MHz. Loss up to 42 dB
can be accommodated with the separately available 21-dB in-line preamplifier (P/N AS0044700).
24 GPS Antenna and Cable Information

DC Resistance

The cross-sectional area and length of the conductors in the cable determine the dc resistance.
Since power to the RF preamplifier in the antenna is supplied via the antenna cable, excessive dc
resistance will degrade performance.
Because of the above factors, changes to the length and/or type of antenna cable should be made
carefully. Damaged cables may also affect performance.

Available Antenna Cables and Accessories for Longer Runs

Arbiter Systems offers longer antenna cables for use with all models of clocks when the standard
15-meter (50-foot) cable is inadequate. For RG-6 cable runs greater than 250 feet, up to 500 feet,
Arbiter offers a 21-dB in-line amplifier, P/N AS0044700. A larger RG-11 style cable is available
(P/N WC0004900, 305-m / 1000-ft roll), that can be used for runs to 120 meters (400 feet) without
the in-line preamplifier, or 240 meters (800 feet) with the AS0044700 amplifier. See a list of these
accessories in Table 4.2.

P/N Description Delay, ns Signal Level, dB

CA0021315 15-m (50-ft) cable, RG-6 60 ns -5 dB
CA0021330 30-m (100-ft) cable, RG-6 119 ns -9 dB
CA0021345 45-m (150-ft) cable, RG-6 177 ns -13 dB
CA0021360 60-m (200-ft) cable, RG-6 236 ns -17 dB
CA0021375 75-m (250-ft) cable, RG-6 295 ns -21 dB
WC0004900 305-m (1000-ft) roll RG-11 3.92 ns/m -17.5 dB/100 m
AS0044800 RG-11 crimp tool and 25 connectors N/A N/A
AS0044700 21-dB in-line amplifier 1 ns +21 dB

Table 4.2: GPS Cable Data and Accessory Information

Physical Protection

When routing the antenna cable, protect it from physical damage, which may result from closing
doors, falling objects, foot traffic, etc. Also, when routing around corners, allow for sufficient bend
radius to prevent kinks. Extra length should be allowed at both ends of the cable to prevent tension
on the connectors, which could cause damage or failure. Extra length is useful as a service loop, in
the event that a connector needs replacement.
Do not stretch the cable mid-air over any appreciable distance without support. Cable degradation
or failure could result. Always leave a drip loop wherever the cable enters a structure, to prevent
water from entering the structure via the cable jacket. The maximum temperature rating for the
type of cable provided with the clock is 75o C (167o F). Exercise care when routing the cable near
sources of heat to avoid cable damage.
4.4 Technical Details on GPS, Antennas and Cables 25

Adjacent Signals
Although the standard RG-6 style cable is triple-shielded and has excellent shielding properties, be
cautious when routing near high power RF sources or alongside cables carrying high power RF, such
as transmitter cables. In these applications, consider using RG-11 style cable (P/N WC0004900).
Its quad-shielded design provides even more isolation.

Antenna Power
The RF preamplifier within the antenna requires 5 Vdc at 13 mA maximum for operation. A
power supply within the clock generates this voltage, which is applied to the antenna via the two
conductors of the coaxial antenna cable. Avoid shorting the center conductor to the shield of the
coaxial cable as it may damage the preamplifier. Conversely, a high-resistance connection or open
circuit would deprive the preamplifier of power. Either a short- or open-circuit condition in the
antenna cable will render the clock inoperable.
Prior to initial operation or if problems are suspected, perform the Antenna/Cable Operational
Test Procedure described in Section 4.2.

Connection to Antenna
The male Type F connector on one end of the antenna cable mates with the female Type F connector
on the antenna. Avoid placing mechanical stress on the cable attachment to the antenna.

Connection to Clock
The male Type F connector on the opposite end of the antenna cable connects to the female Type
F connector on the rear panel of the Substation Clock.

User-Supplied Antenna Cables

Any RF cable meeting the requirements described above for loss (< 21 dB at 1575 MHz) and dc
resistance (< 15 ohms total loop resistance) may be used with the clock. However, prior to using
a non-standard antenna cable, verify proper installation by performing the Power Supply Test and
Antenna Resistance Test above.
For additional technical details concerning the GPS, GPS antennas and antenna cabling see Ap-
pendix A, Technical Details and Specifications.
26 GPS Antenna and Cable Information
Chapter 5

Setting Internal Jumpers

5.1 Introduction
Jumpers in the the 1088B series clocks are already set up at the factory according to the purchase
order. If it should be necessary to change any jumpers or to enable any new function, you should
follow the instructions in this section.
This section should assist you with understanding and setting the internal main board jumpers in
the Model 1088B. After correctly setting the necessary jumpers, go to Chapter 6, The Setup Menu,
for details on how to configure these signals from the front panel keys. Most settings may also be
configured through the RS-232 port. If you wish to know additional technical details about timing
signals, please see Chapter 7, Timing, IRIG-B, and Pulses.
NOTE: Values in tables marked with an “*” show default positions.

5.2 Changing Hardware Settings Via Internal Jumpers

The 1088B incorporate a flexible input and output (I/O) selection system, which is made possible
by an innovative internal jumper scheme. Each of the four, standard, rear-panel I/O connectors
can be reconfigured to perform any of the available output functions. Alternatively, any or all of
the I/O connectors can be set to act as an input to the 1088B. However, each of the I/O connectors
is assigned only one specific and exclusive input function.
Besides configuring the four main output connectors, there are other settings that will be explained
in this section. These include whether to use the RS-232 port or one of the standard I/O connectors
for event input signals, setting the frequency reference for the clock, and setting the battery-backed
RAM.
When changing any of the jumpers you will want to refer to the main board layout diagram in
Figure 5.1 to locate jumper positions. Tables 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 will also help to identify meanings
to the various settings.
28 Setting Internal Jumpers

Figure 5.1: Model 1088B Main Board

5.2 Changing Hardware Settings Via Internal Jumpers 29

5.2.1 Cover Removal

To change jumper configurations, the instrument cover must be removed. Remove top cover as
follows:
1. On all Models disconnect the power cord. If equipped with Option 04 (power switch), first
turn the power switch to OFF.

2. Using a T-25 driver, remove the four screws securing the cover (and rack-mount ears, if used).

3. Lift the cover off.

4. Figure 5.1 illustrates the main board and locates all the jumpers. Also, a label located on the
inside of the top cover provides a quick reference for the I/O functions and their respective
jumper settings.

Warning DO NOT REMOVE TOP COVER WHILE POWER IS APPLIED. HAZARDOUS

VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WHILE THE POWER CORD IS CONNECTED. ALWAYS DIS-
CONNECT THE UNIT FROM THE INPUT POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVAL OF THE
TOP COVER.

5.2.2 JMP1 − Event A and B Selection

The Model 1088B has the capability to provide for two possible event inputs: Event A and Event B.
Jumper 1 selects the port to which the Event A signal is applied, either the standard I/O connector
(J4) or the main RS-232 port. Position A selects the standard I/O and position B selects the main
RS-232 port. Event B input is always applied to J3. Event A and Event B alternatively provide
for 1 PPS deviation measurements. These measurements are continuously updated each second.

5.2.3 JMP2 − Frequency Reference Selection

The Model 1088B is able to use an external timing reference instead of the internal clock signal.
Usable signals are 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 5 MHz and 10 MHz. For external reference operation set JMP2
to position B and select the External Reference Input Frequency with JMP3. Acceptable signal
levels for an external reference are 5-volt TTL/CMOS. See Table 5.1

Reference Frequency JMP2 JMP3 JMP15 Source

Internal Standard A* X A,C Internal
Option 12A B B A,C Internal
External 10 MHz B A B External
External 5 MHz B B B External
External 1 MHz B C B External
External 100 kHz B D B External

Table 5.1: External Reference Input Frequency Settings (JMP3)

30 Setting Internal Jumpers

5.2.4 JMP3 − External Reference Input Frequency

Used in conjunction with Jumper 2 in setting up an external reference signal to replace the Model
1088B internal clock. Four choices are available: “A” − 10 MHz, “B” − 5 MHz, “C” − 1 MHz and
“D” − 100 kHz. If you are going to apply an external reference signal, make sure to read details
of JMP2 above. See Table 5.1.

5.2.5 JMP4, JMP7, JMP10, JMP13 − Output Function Selection

Jumpers JMP4, JMP7, JMP10, and JMP13 determine the output signals, which can be made
available at I/O connectors J2, J3, J4, and J5, respectively. Figure 5.1 illustrates the relationship
between these jumpers and the I/O connectors (the position of some jumpers is slightly different
in the Model 1088A). The first step in setting an I/O channel for a specific output signal is to
move the associated jumper to the location corresponding to the desired signal. Table 5.2 lists the
jumper settings required for various signals. JMP5, JMP8, JMP11 and JMP14 (located at the top
of the columns of Output Function jumpers) refer to the two analog signals available from setting
jumper positions 1 and 2. They will not be referred to in the setup, but listed for your information.

5.2.6 JMP5, JMP8, JMP11, JMP14 − Output Function Selection

These jumpers are essentially the same as JMP13, JMP10, JMP7 and JMP4 (in that order),
however they exist because they were used to signify the difference between digital signals and
analog signals. Jumpers 5, 8, 11 and 14 are designated for analog signals, Jumpers 4, 7, 10 and 13
as digital signals.

5.2.7 JMP6, JMP9, JMP12, JMP15 − Output Mode Selection

The next step in configuring the I/O connectors is to determine whether the assigned signal is an
analog output, a digital output, or an input (configuring the connectors as inputs is described later
in this chapter) . Select the output mode by setting jumpers JMP6, JMP9, JMP12, and JMP15 to
the appropriate positions. These jumpers correspond to connectors J2, J3, J4, and J5, respectively
(see Figure 5.1). If the I/O channel is to be used as a digital output, the corresponding jumper
should be set to position “A”. If the I/O channel is to be used as an analog output, the jumper
should be set to position “C”. Table 5.2 lists jumper positions for individual output signals.
5.2 Changing Hardware Settings Via Internal Jumpers 31

Output Signal Output-Function Output-Mode

Description Jumper Position Jumper Position
IRIG-B Modulated 10 Vpp 1* C*
Deviation (5 V) 2 C
IRIG-B 3* A*
IRIG-E 4 A
IRIG-H 5 A
10 MPPS 6 A
5 MPPS 7 A
1 MPPS 8 A
100 kPPS 9 A
10 kPPS 10 A
1 kPPS 11 A
100 PPS 12 A
60 PPS 13 A
50 PPS 14 A
10 PPS 15 A
IRIG-D/1 PPM 16 A
1 PPH 17 A
1 PPS 18 A
Programmable Pulse 19 A
Out-of-Lock 20 A
IRIG-B Modified Manchester 21 A
Spare 5 V CMOS 22 A

Table 5.2: Output Signal Function Selection

*Default jumper selections

5.2.8 I/O Connectors Used as Output

For each I/O connector, it is necessary to set 2 jumpers in order to assign the output (or input)
signal. The following paragraphs describe the procedure for setting these jumpers. For standard
configuration, J2 and J3 are set to unmodulated IRIG-B, J4 and J5 are set to modulated IRIG-B.
For example, to set J2 as modulated, JMP4 = 1 and JMP6 = C.
32 Setting Internal Jumpers

5.2.9 JMP16 − Battery Backed RAM

Jumper 16 is used to connect the battery to program RAM. This specific RAM is used to store
any user-configured information such as serial port preferences, local offsets and timing settings
− anything found in SETUP menu. With the battery disconnected (JMP16 set to OFF), all the
user-configured information would be lost when the clock is powered off or loses power.

5.2.10 JMP17 − Output Enable

This jumper is used at the factory for setting the output enable for the 5V CMOS output buffers.
For normal operation, set jumper to position “A”. With two clocks containing Option 18 and
configured for redundant operation, this jumper may be set to position “B”, allowing the CMOS
outputs to be paralleled and driven by the on-line clock. Normally, this jumper will be configured
as required when delivered from the factory and set to position “A”.

5.2.11 I/O Connector Used as Input

Any of the four I/O connectors included with the standard model can be reconfigured to operate
as an input. However, each connector is restricted to the input function listed for it as seen below
in Table 5.3.
To reconfigure any I/O connector as “an input”, all that is required is to set the corresponding I/O
jumper to position “B”. It is not necessary to change the position of the output function jumper,
as this will have no effect on input operation.

Connector Function
J2 Auxiliary Input
J3 Event B Input
J4 Event A Input
J5 External Reference Input

Table 5.3: Rear Panel I/O Connector Input Functions

Chapter 6

The Setup Menus

This section should guide you in configuring the Model 1088B operation using the SETUP Menus or
RS-232C port(s). These menus allow you to configure the operation according to your preferences.
Logically, use the setup menus after installing the clock for the first time, or changing any of the
main-board jumpers as described in Chapter 5.
Two of the most common setup menus for any application are (1) configuring the Local Offset
and Daylight Saving values, and (2) setting up the IRIG-B outputs for the correct time zone. To
operate with the correct time in your locale, you will need to configure the Local Offset (from UTC)
and Daylight Saving, or Summer Time, changeover settings. There are a number of other settings
that may be important to your application, however local time offsets are normally fundamental
requirements. For a complete list of setup menus, see Table 6.1.
There are two methods available for configuring the Model 1088B: (1) Using the lower row of keys
on the front panel, and (2) using either the main RS-232C port or Option RS-232C port. Both
methods are described in this section. For complete information on configuring all clocks remotely
through either serial port, please refer to Chapter 9, Serial Communication and Command Set.
At the end of each SETUP menu section are references to the corresponding RS-232C command(s)
for configuring these functions.
Table 6.1 lists the various menus used to configure the operation of these clock models.

6.1 Setup Menus

6.1.1 To Begin Configuring
Press the SETUP key to enter the clock configuration menus, starting with communication port
parameters (Set Main RS-232?).

SETUP: Press the Setup key repeatedly to scroll through the main menus. Also, after pressing
SETUP once, you can press the UP or DOWN keys to scroll the menus. In numeric data entry
mode, press SETUP to move the cursor to the left.
34 The Setup Menus

No. Setup Menus Setup Items

1 Main RS-232C Main RS-232C Port Parameters and Broadcast
2 Local Hour & DST Set Local Offset, Daylight Saving mode
3 Out Of Lock Set Time Interval Before Alarm
4 Backlight Set to ON, OFF or AUTO
5 System Delays Set Timing Delay in Nanoseconds
6 Programmable Pulse Set Mode, Pulse Width and Time Zone
7 IRIG-B Time Data Set IRIG-B Time Zone and IEEE-1344
8 Event/Deviation Set for Event, or 1–PPS Deviation
9 Freq. Reference Set to Internal or External
10 Set Auto Survey Set Survey mode
11 Position Hold Set ON or OFF
12 Option Control Set Slot A and Slot B options

Table 6.1: Front-Panel Setup Menus

ENTER: Press the Enter key to confirm changes made within SETUP menus. Generally, pressing
ENTER also advances the next parameter, or returns to the previous menu level. In numeric data
entry mode, press ENTER to move the cursor to the right.
UP: Press the UP key, within the SETUP menus, to adjust numerical values upward, or to scroll
upward through the available menu choices. The UP key also assists in navigating through main
Setup Menus in normal order.
DOWN: Press the DOWN key, within the SETUP menu, to adjust numerical values downward, or
to scroll downward through available menu choices. Also assists in navigating through main Setup
menus in reverse order.

6.1.2 Numeric Data Entry Mode

Numeric data entry mode is activated anytime you enter a menu that requires a change in numerical
value and press either the UP or DOWN key to change the digit value. When in this mode, the
function of the SETUP and ENTER keys change to give left and right cursor control.

6.1.3 Default Firmware Settings

When shipped from the factory, and unless specified otherwise, all models will be configured with
default settings. Many users elect to modify the clock settings to fit their locale and desired
operation. Default settings are listed in Table 6.2.
6.2 Setting the Main RS-232C Port 35

Menu Item Default Menu Item Default

Main RS-232 9600, 8, N, 1 Local Offset & DST none, OFF
Out-of-Lock 01 min. Backlight Auto
System Delays 60 ns Prog Pulse Sec. per Pulse
IRIG-B Time Data UTC, 1344 OFF Event/Deviation 1 PPS Deviation
Freq. Reference Internal Auto Survey Power On Survey
Position Hold On Option Control None

Table 6.2: Default Firmware Settings

6.1.4 To Exit Setup Menus

To exit any configuration menu without saving, press any of the upper row of keys before pressing
ENTER (which installs a new value). To return to the configuration menus, press SETUP again.
If you make a configuration error, you can scroll through the menus again and press ENTER when
you find the menu you want to change.

6.2 Setting the Main RS-232C Port

Press SETUP key to configure the main RS-232C port, and press the ENTER key to begin setting
up the RS-232C port parameters (See Figure 6.1). To set up the broadcast mode, press SETUP
(instead of ENTER) and skip to Section 6.2.2 below.

Figure 6.1: Main RS-232C Setup

36 The Setup Menus

6.2.1 Setting Serial Port Parameters

The “Set Port Config” menu allows you to configure any of the RS-232C port parameters from
the front panel. Use the UP and DOWN keys to adjust the parameter values. RS-232C: Port
parameters may not be changed from RS-232C ports. They may only be changed from the front
panel.

Figure 6.2: Serial Port Parameter Setup

6.2.2 Setting the Broadcast Mode from Main RS-232

The “Set Broadcast Mode” menu allows you to configure any of these clock models to broadcast
ASCII time/date-related data from the available RS-232C ports. With the UP/DOWN keys select
the desired broadcast mode and press ENTER to immediately start the broadcast. RS-232C: see
Section 9.2.1. Bypass the SET A EVENT and ARM A EVENT menus by pressing the SETUP
key.

Figure 6.3: Broadcast Setup

6.3 Set Local Hour 37

6.3 Set Local Hour

Use “Set Local Hour” to offset the time from UTC to your locale and any Daylight Saving settings
if they apply. Offsets may be adjusted in 15-minute increments, up to plus or minus 12 hours.
Daylight Saving is adjusted for start and stop times, based on month, week of month, day and time
of day. See menu in Section 6.3.1 to set up basic DST adjustment. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.4.

Figure 6.4: Local Hour Setup

38 The Setup Menus

6.3.1 Set Daylight Saving Time (DST)

For automatic changeover, use the AUTO setting explained above. Make sure to determine the
changeover requirements in your locale before trying to adjust these clock settings. The default
setup is for North America, where DST begins on the second Sunday of March at 2 am and ends
on the first Sunday of November at 2 am. Go through each setting and verify that the settings
are valid. To adjust and install values, press the UP/DOWN keys to adjust the desired value and
ENTER key to install that value and proceed to the next setting. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.4.

Figure 6.5: Auto Daylight Saving Setup

6.4 Set Out of Lock 39

6.4 Set Out of Lock

Use the “Set Out of Lock” feature to control how the clock responds to an out-of-lock condition.
Out of Lock means that the GPS receiver in the clock is no longer tracking any satellites and that
the time may drift according to characteristics of the internal clock and environmental conditions.
Adjust these settings so that, in the event of an out-of-lock condition, you will be notified in a
reasonable amount of time. The default setting is for the clock to alarm after being unlocked for a
period of one minute. Unlocked indications include the red UNLOCKED LED being ON, and (if
equipped) the Out-of-Lock relay changing state. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.12.

Figure 6.6: Out-of-Lock Setup

Extend Relay Start means that the clock will extend the time that the clock is not considered
stabilized, the unlocked LED is lit, and (if equipped) the out-of-lock relay indicates an out-of-lock
condition. Choose NO for the standard (shorter) indication, or YES to lengthen the out-of-lock
indication to approximately 5 minutes under good satellite reception. Note that when choosing
the extended relay start condition, the clock may be tracking sufficient satellites to be considered
“locked” however it does not indicate that it is until completing the internal counting function.
40 The Setup Menus

6.5 Set Back Light

If the optional back light (Option 01) is installed in the clock, use the “Set Back Light” menu to
configure how the back light operates. If back light is not installed, then the “Set Back Light”
menu will have no effect. Settings are either (1) Back Light OFF, (2) Back light ON, or (3) Back
light AUTO. In the Auto setting, the back light will operate for approximately 30 seconds before
switching OFF. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.5.

Figure 6.7: Back Light Setup

6.6 Set System Delays 41

6.6 Set System Delays

Use the “Set System Delays” menu to set the delay in time for the GPS signal received at the GPS
antenna to reach the GPS receiver. The delay in nanoseconds (10−9 seconds) is a product of the
length of the cable and the its velocity factor. Without compensating for the cable delay, the time
would be slow by this amount. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.11.

Figure 6.8: System Delay Setup

42 The Setup Menus

6.7 Set Programmable Pulse Mode

Use the “Set Prog. Pulse” menu to set up one of the many pulse modes available for broadcasting
a pulse from J2 − J5 (see Table 5.2 and Figure 5.1) at a predetermined interval or rate. Also,
there is a “pulse-per-day” mode and a “pulse-per-year” mode. Programming includes adjusting the
pulse width, from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to 600 seconds, depending on the application, and
configuring the pulse to occur at either UTC or Local time. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.10.

Figure 6.9: Programmable Pulse Setup

6.7.1 Entering Numerical Values

When installing numerical values first use the UP/DOWN keys to change the digits and then the
SETUP and ENTER to move the cursor left or right. Then, use the UP/DOWN keys as before
to change digits. To complete the installation after you have configured the numerical value, press
the ENTER key repeatedly to move the cursor to the right and exit the menu.
6.7 Set Programmable Pulse Mode 43

6.7.2 Prog Pulse – Seconds–Per–Pulse Mode

Use the Seconds–Per–Pulse mode to generate a pulse every X number of seconds, from 1 to 60,000
seconds, and a Pulse Width of from 10 milliseconds to 600 seconds. Refer to Section 6.7 above for
additional detail on the Programmable Pulse mode. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.10.

Figure 6.10: Seconds–Per–Pulse Setup

44 The Setup Menus

6.7.3 Prog Pulse – Pulse–Per–Hour Mode

Use the Pulse–Per–Hour mode to generate a pulse every hour, at the number of specified seconds
(from 0 to 3599 seconds) after the hour. Refer to Section 6.7 above for additional detail on the
Programmable Pulse mode, and Entering Numerical Values. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.10.

Figure 6.11: Pulse–Per–Hour Setup

6.7 Set Programmable Pulse Mode 45

6.7.4 Prog Pulse – Pulse–Per–Day Mode

Use the Pulse–Per–Day mode to generate a pulse every day, at the specified hour, minute, second
and fractional seconds. Refer to Section 6.7 above for additional detail on the Programmable Pulse
mode, and Entering Numerical Values. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.10.

Figure 6.12: Pulse–Per–Day Setup

46 The Setup Menus

6.7.5 Prog Pulse – Single Trigger

Use the Single Trigger mode to generate a pulse once per year at the specified Julian Day, hour,
minute, second and fractional seconds. For reference, many calendars indicate the Julian Day.
Refer to Section 6.7 above for additional detail on the Programmable Pulse mode, and Entering
Numerical Values. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.10.

Figure 6.13: Single Trigger Setup

6.7 Set Programmable Pulse Mode 47

6.7.6 Prog Pulse – Slow Code

Slow code is a programmable pulse mode that causes the output voltage to be held high and go
low for six seconds on the day, four seconds on the hour and two seconds on the minute. Note:
Make sure to set the Pulse Polarity to negative for normal operation. See Section 6.7.7. RS-232C:
see Section 9.2.10.

Figure 6.14: Slow Code Setup

48 The Setup Menus

6.7.7 Prog Pulse – Pulse Polarity

Use “Pulse Polarity” to change the pulse’s OFF-to-ON behavior as follows:

1. Positive: the voltage is held low (0 Vdc) when the pulse is off and transitions high (5 Vdc)
when on.

2. Negative: the voltage is held high (5 Vdc) when the pulse is off and transitions low (0 Vdc)
when on.

To set up the pulse polarity, first set up the programmable pulse mode (e.g. Single Trigger) and then
go back into the Prog Pulse menu and set up the polarity separately. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.10.

Figure 6.15: Pulse Polarity Setup

6.8 Set IRIG Time Data 49

6.8 Set IRIG Time Data

Use the “Set IRIG Time Data” menu to adjust the time zone for IRIG-B Time Data between your
locale and UTC, and to turn ON or OFF the IEEE-1344 extension. The IEEE-1344 extension
controls some additional information contained in the IRIG-B time code (see Section 7.3.3). RS-
232C: see Section 9.2.6.

Figure 6.16: IRIG-B Time Data Setup

50 The Setup Menus

6.9 Setting the Event/Deviation Modes (A or B)

Use the Event/Deviation Mode to capture an event at J3 and/or J4; alternatively use the main
RS-232C port for Event A. Configure for either event timing (up to 200 stored events per channel),
or one pulse-per-second (1 PPS) deviation, including sigma (see Section 8.2.3 for details on the
principle of deviation measurement). RS-232C: see Section 9.2.2.

Figure 6.17: Event/Deviation Mode Setup

6.9 Setting the Event/Deviation Modes (A or B) 51

6.9.1 Arming the Event Input

When using J3 or J4, note that the event function continually arms itself for the next event until
the buffer is full. When using the RS-232C port as the input, you must arm the event function for
each event from the front panel or by using the AR command. To arm the Event Input from the
front panel see Figure 6.18 below.

Figure 6.18: Arming the Event Mode From Front Panel

52 The Setup Menus

6.9.2 Setting The Frequency Reference

The Model 1088B can accept an external clock signal in place of the internal clock signal. If you are
going to use an external Frequency Reference, connect it to J5 on the rear panel. Acceptable signals
are 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 5 MHz and 10 MHz. To allow for an external clock signal, you must first set
jumpers correctly (See Section 5.2.4) and configure the clock for use with an external reference.
Set this through the setup menu, “SET FREQ. REFERENCE?”.

Figure 6.19: Setting the Frequency Reference From Front Panel

6.10 Setting the Auto Survey Mode 53

6.10 Setting the Auto Survey Mode

Use one of the Auto Survey modes to control how and when the clock determines position infor-
mation. The accuracy of the position (and indirectly, time) is based on averaging the assigned
number of position fixes surveyed, either during startup or by a single survey. At the conclusion
of a survey, the clock is placed in Position Hold mode and the averaged position is placed into
memory. If accurate position information is used, this results in a reduced standard deviation for
the time data. RS-232C: see Section 9.2.8.
There are five Auto Survey modes available:
1. Turn Off Survey – halt the survey in progress
2. Single Survey – initiate a new survey at this time
3. Power-On Survey – initiate a new survey when the clock is powered on
4. Suspend Survey – pause a survey in progress
5. Resume Survey – resume a survey that was paused

Figure 6.20: Survey Mode Setup

6.10.1 Number of Fixes

Auto Survey configuration presents a list of possible surveys from 1 to 86,400 seconds (approx. 24
hours). Surveys are listed as 1 (single fix), 60 (1 minute or more), 300 (5 minutes or more), 900 (15
minutes or more), 1800 (30 minutes or more), 3600 (1 hour or more), 7200 (2 hours or more), 14400
(4 hours or more), 28800 (8 hours or more), 43200 (12 hours or more), and 86400 (24 hours or
more). To complete a survey, the GPS receiver must be tracking at least four satellites. If, during
a survey, the number of satellites being tracked drops below four, the survey will pause until the
GPS receiver again begins tracking four or more satellites. Then, the survey will resume computing
positions until completion.
54 The Setup Menus

6.11 Set Position Hold ON or OFF

With Position Hold turned ON, the surveyed position is placed into memory and used for computing
more precise timing solutions. With Position Hold turned OFF, the GPS receiver is placed in the
Fix mode, calculating a new position approximately every second. In the Fix mode, the position
information will appear to be changing each second as viewed on the clock display or being returned
from the RS-232C [Link]-232C: see Section 9.2.7.

Figure 6.21: Position Hold Mode Setup

6.11.1 Edit Position Data

To manually edit geographical position and elevation, you must first turn Survey mode to OFF and
Position Hold ON. Position may then be edited using RS-232 commands listed in Section 9.2.7.
Note that the entered position data must be accurate or the time will not be accurate.
6.12 Set Option Control 55

6.12 Set Option Control

The Model 1088B has two internal option slots (Slot A and Slot B) to increase its functionality.
Use the “Set Option Control” menu to configure any Slot A or Slot B option mounted in the clock.
Some of these options require you to configure additional settings; information for configuring
specific options is located in the Option List (see Appendix C), by option number. For RS-232C
commands, see Section 9.2.13.

Figure 6.22: Option Control Setup

56 The Setup Menus
Chapter 7

Timing, IRIG-B and Pulses

7.1 Introduction
This section should help you with understanding, choosing and connecting the correct outputs from
the Model 1088B series clocks to synchronize equipment, such as protective relays. It should also
answer some basic questions, such as:

• What are the different types of IRIG-B, and how are they different?

• How do you connect multiple devices to one timing output?

• How far can you transmit timing signals?

• What type of cabling and connectors should I use?

Often, questions arise about how many loads the output driver will support, how they should be
connected, and how to connect cabling between the clock and the relay. Certain protective relays,
or digital fault recorders may use a different style connector than available at the clock outputs.
Finally, simple questions about which type of cabling (coax or a twisted pair) is best. This section
should help to answer these common questions.
The steps involved in getting your devices synchronized to the Model 1088B are fairly simple and
should not take long to complete. To expedite the process, make sure that you know:

1. the type of timing signal each piece of equipment requires, and

2. how to enable the equipment to receive the timing signal.

Various methods are used to configure equipment for IRIG-B including setting a physical jumper, or
setup program. Some equipment can auto detect the timing signal, so that nothing else is required
other than connecting the cable.
58 Timing, IRIG-B and Pulses

7.2 Timing Output Description

When viewing the rear panel of the Model 1088B, you will see that there are a number of different
types of connectors as illustrated in Figure 7.1. Generally, there is a power inlet connector, a GPS
antenna connector, one DB-9 serial connectors, a series of four connector plugs and one option
plate. The hole plugs cover the connector holes for option Slot A, and the option plate covers Slot
B, used to house accessory boards that provide additional functionality to the 1088B.

Figure 7.1: Rear Panel Descriptions

7.2.1 Standard Inputs/Outputs

The Model 1088B has four BNC female connectors that can supply up to twenty-two different
timing signals to external equipment. Two of these connectors (J3 and J4) may also be configured
for an event/deviation inputs. All of the outputs are designed for digital and analog signals that
are configured using internal jumpers. Signals supplied to the digital drivers include unmodulated
IRIG-B, many different pulse outputs per second, and programmable pulse.

7.2.2 Digital Drivers

Each digital output is driven by one of the four outputs from a single CMOS 74HC126 quad driver
capable of supplying 18 mA (each) at 5 Vdc. To determine the maximum number of devices that
each digital driver can support, you will need to determine the load current, or input impedance,
for each connected device. For example, if the IED timing input signal (e.g. IRIG-B003) requires
1 mA, one output channel should be able to support 18 such devices. If the load current is more
or less, then you can connect any number of devices up to the current limit for one output.

7.2.3 Analog Drivers

The 1088B has one analog driver per output available for modulated IRIG-B signals and ±5 V
deviation for a chart recorder. Additional analog drivers may be added as options (e.g. Option
03, 27, 29). The analog driver uses a series of LF353 op amps, which supply a 10 Vpp signal
through a 557-ohm source resistor, or 4.5 Vpp on Option 27, to IED’s. With increasing load
current from external IED’s more voltage is dropped across the clock source resistor and the drive
voltage decreases. Matching the modulated IRIG-B output voltage to the IED input is sometimes
critical, so it is important to match the modulated IRIG-B peak-to-peak voltage to within the
specified range of the IED. Table 7.1 shows how the actual drive voltage varies with increasing load
current. For IED’s with a restricted input range, it may be necessary to match the available drive
voltage to the IED through a small dropping resistor.
7.3 Output Signal Description 59

Drive Current, mA Actual Drive Voltage, Vpp

0 10.0 (no load)
1 9.4
10 4.43
15 1.64

Table 7.1: Drive Current vs. Voltage

7.3 Output Signal Description

Model 1088A/B can provide twenty different digital signals and two analog signals that are listed
in Table 5.2. With an option card installed in Slot A or B, all of these signals are available at
the option card as well; see Appendix C for output options with listed digital signals. Most of the
information in this section is devoted to IRIG-B, its specifications and differences.

7.3.1 IRIG-B Description

IRIG-B is a complete serial time code that occurs once per second and, depending on the config-
uration, contains the day of year, hours, minutes, seconds, year and other important information.
The Model 1095A/C transmits Format B with four variations as seen in Table 7.2. Note that with
the newer IRIG Standard 200-04, two of the designations have changed: the older B000 has become
B004 and B120 has become B124.

Designation Old/New Signal Type Code Components

B000/B004 Pulse width code, No carrier BCDT OY , CF, SBS
B003 Pulse width code, No carrier BCDT OY , SBS
B120/B124 Sine wave, amplitude modulated, 1 kHz BCDT OY , CF, SBS
B123 Sine wave, amplitude modulated, 1 kHz BCDT OY , SBS

Table 7.2: Available IRIG-B Time Codes

The IRIG-B time code consists of 100 bits produced every second, 74 bits of which contain
various time, date, time changes and time quality information of the time signal. Consisting of
logic ones, zeros and position identifier bits, the time code provides a reliable method of transmitting
time to synchronize various equipment.
There are three functional groups of bits in the IRIG-B time code, in the following order: Binary
Coded Decimal (BCD), Control Function (CF) and Straight Binary Seconds (SBS). The BCD group
contains only time information including the seconds, minutes, hours and days, recycling yearly.
The CF group contains other time-related information including year, time quality, leap year,
pending leap seconds and parity. The SBS consists of the total elapsed seconds, restarting daily.
Position identifiers separate the various components of the IRIG-B time code.
60 Timing, IRIG-B and Pulses

7.3.2 Modulated and Unmodulated IRIG-B

Figure 7.2 illustrates the primary differences between modulated and unmodulated IRIG-B. You
will notice that the while modulated IRIG-B is distinctive because of the 1 kHz sinewave carrier,
it is similar to unmodulated IRIG-B since the peak-to-peak values of the carrier follow the same
form as the digital waveform, where the information is contained.

Figure 7.2: IRIG-B Waveforms

7.3.3 IRIG-B IEEE 1344 Extension

As mentioned above, the IEEE 1344 enables extra bits of the Control Function (CF) portion of the
IRIG-B time code. Within this portion of the time code, bits are designated for additional features,
including:
• Calendar Year (old method, now called BCDY EAR )
• Leap seconds, and leap seconds pending
• Daylight saving time (DST), and DST pending
• Local time offset
• Time quality
• Parity
• Position identifiers
To be able to use these extra bits of information, protective relays, RTU’s and other equipment
receiving the time code must be able to decode them. Consult your equipment manual to determine
if the IEEE 1344 feature should be turned ON in the clock. To view details of the IEEE Std 1344-
1995, please check with the IEEE.
NOTE: To download a copy of of the IRIG-B 2004 specification, please use the following link to
the Arbiter web site.
[Link] and look under Application Notes/Option
Information.

7.3.4 1 Pulse-per-Second (1 PPS)

A one pulse-per-second timing output signal is very simple in concept. It is a digital bit transmitted
every second with a pulse width of 10 milliseconds. Probably the most critical part of this signal is
7.4 Connecting Outputs 61

that the rising edge is “on time” as compared with the signal from the Global Positioning System
(GPS). It has the same drive power as any other digital signal available from the 1088B. See
Figure 7.2 for a comparison between unmodulated IRIG-B and 1 PPS.

7.3.5 Programmable Pulse (PROG PULSE)

The Model 1088B has an independent programmable pulse feature that requires setting a jumper
on the main board and configuring the pulse mode through the SETUP menus or RS-232 port.
Programmable pulse modes include setting the pulse width (except for Single Trigger and Slow
Code modes) and time zone. To configure, please see Sections 5.2 and 6.7.

Prog Pulse Mode Configured Feature

Seconds Per Pulse X number of seconds between pulses, 0 – 60,000
Pulse Per Hour Number of seconds after each hour, 0 – 3599
Pulse Per Day Hour, Minute, Second, Fractional Seconds
Single Trigger Day, Hour, Minute, Second, Fractional Seconds
Slow Code ON or OFF
Pulse Polarity positive– or negative–going pulse

Table 7.3: IRIG-B Code Designations

7.4 Connecting Outputs

All clocks come equipped with BNC female connectors, however if you are using twisted pair cabling,
you can use a BNC breakout. See the reference below1 , or other similar adapter.
NOTE: If using a shielded, twisted-pair cable (like Belden 8760), DO NOT connect the cable shield
at the clock. Always connect a cable shield at the receiving equipment (IED) grounding point.

7.4.1 Attaching Cables to Screw Terminals

Some of the option boards mounted in the Model 1088B have screw terminals instead of BNC
connectors to connect wiring. To mount wiring to screw terminals, prepare the twisted pair cable
by stripping back at least 1/4” of the insulation and any shielding; DO NOT tin the bare wire with
solder. Tighten the screw down on the wire. Do not ground the shield to the Arbiter clock, rather
ground it at the receiving end.

7.4.2 How Far Can I Run IRIG-B Cabling?

Before laying cable to transmit IRIG-B over long distances, take time to consider the following
factors: (1) resistive losses in cabling, (2) electromagnetic interference, (3) propagation delays and
(4) installation and maintenance costs.
1
Pomona Electrics, [Link], (800) 444-6785, (425) 446-6010, part no. 4969 and 4970
62 Timing, IRIG-B and Pulses

For details on distributing IRIG-B signals over long distances, see application note, AN101, Dis-
tributing Timing Signals in a High-EMI Environment. Download file [Link] at the follow-
ing link:
[Link]
For important considerations about IRIG-B connections, distribution of signals and accuracy, down-
load the file,
IRIG-B accuracy and connection [Link] at the following link:

[Link]

7.4.3 Synchronizing Multiple IED’s From One Masterclock Output

In many installations, master clock signals are “fanned out” to a number of devices. This method
makes more efficient use of the clock synchronizing capability since the clock drivers are designed to
handle multiple loads. To compute number of possible loads per output, first determine the input
impedance of each connected IED. For example, if the input impedance of the IED is 5 kilohms,
determine the device current (I) as follows:

(7.1) I = V ÷ Rdev = 5 V olts ÷ 5000 Ohms = 0.001 Amps (1 mA)

If you were to connect ten of the same IED’s to the same output, then the total current drawn
would be 10 x 0.001 A = 0.01 A (10 mA).

7.4.4 Connecting Unmodulated IRIG-B

To drive multiple loads from one unmodulated IRIG-B output, make sure that the loads are wired
in parallel. Some technicians might call this “daisy-chaining”, however the idea is to drive all of
these loads in parallel from the single output. It is much simpler to connect loads to unmodulated
IRIG-B than for modulated, because all of the loads are driven at the same voltage.
To determine load current for one Unmodulated IRIG-B output:
1. determine the desired number of loads to be connected to a single clock output
2. determine the impedance (or resistance) of each load
3. calculate the load current for each device (Idev = 5V ÷ Rdev )
4. sum up all the load currents for the total current for one clock output.
Another method is to determine the lumped impedance of all of the connected IED’s in parallel.
Then, determine the overall current by dividing the drive voltage (5 V) by the computed lumped
impedance value. This current should not exceed 18 mA for each output.

7.4.5 Connecting Modulated IRIG-B

The total load capacity for the modulated IRIG-B driver depends on the type and number of loads.
The main difference in computing the load capacity for modulated IRIG-B and unmodulated IRIG-
B is that many of the modulated IRIG-B decoders are fairly sensitive to the peak-to-peak voltage.
When adding loads, the clock’s modulated driver produces more current, which is passes through
the internal source resister, dropping the available output voltage. The open circuit voltage (i.e.
7.4 Connecting Outputs 63

with no loads) is approximately 10 Vpp, so any connected loads will cause the available voltage to
drop. It is a simple task to compute the available output voltage (Vpp) with a known current.

(7.2) V pp = 10 V pp − I × 557 Ohms

Therefore, if you had 10 mA of load current (I load) the available voltage (Vpp) would be 4.43
Vpp. If the load current equals 15 mA, then the available voltage would be 1.64 Vpp. So, you can
see how the increasing load current (i.e number of loads) affects the available drive voltage at the
clock output. See also Table 7.1.

7.4.6 Wire Losses

Another factor affecting the available voltage is the resistive losses through the cabling. Wire has a
certain resistivity associated with it that is determined by its metallic composition, and resistance
determined by the diameter and length. For example, single-strand, 22 AWG (bare, enamel-coated)
copper wire has a resistance of approximately 19.6 ohms per 1000 feet. To compute the loss we
must include both wires in the connection, signal and return. For coaxial cabling, the resistance of
the center conductor is rated differently than the shield. For a twisted pair, both of them should
essentially have the same resistance per cut length. If we use a twisted pair of 22 AWG (copper as
above), then the available voltage (at 10 mA of current) for 500 feet of wire including the source
resistor would be:

(7.3) V pp available = 10 − I × 557 source − I × 19.6 wire = 1.35 V pp

So, you can see that most of the drive voltage is lost with 15 mA of current and 500 feet of 22 AWG
twisted pair transmission line; this includes the voltage losses at the source resistor. 1.35 Vpp may
very likely not be detected by the decoder in some IED’s. Remember to make your cable runs as
short as possible, to use a larger diameter cable, and to carefully distribute the loads.

7.4.7 Voltage Matching for Modulated IRIG-B

With modulated IRIG-B, it was mentioned that certain decoders are very intolerant of drive voltage
variation. If the IED specification says that the acceptable voltage range is 3.3 Vpp ±0.5 volt, and
the available voltage is high, then you must reduce the voltage using a dropping resistor (Rdrop ).
The value of the dropping resistor is determined by dividing the difference voltage (Vdif f ) by the
device current (Idev ). For example, suppose that the available voltage is 4.43 Vpp, the (nominal)
acceptable voltage is 3.3 Vpp, and the device current is 10 mA. Determine the dropping resistor
value.

(7.4) Rdrop = Vdif f ÷ Idev = (4.43 − 3.3) ÷ 0.01 = 113 Ohms

The Power dissipation (P) is:

(7.5) P = I 2 R = 0.012 × 113 = 0.011 W atts

In this example, an eighth-watt resistor should work fine.
For a voltage that is too low, the modulated IRIG-B signal level must be increased by some other
means, such as (1) distributing the load differently to reduce the current (raising the available
voltage), (2) by reducing the cable loss by increasing the wire size, or (3) by using an amplifier.
64 Timing, IRIG-B and Pulses

7.4.8 Cable Delays

Electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light (C) in free space or vacuum and a fraction of that
speed through cabling. The speed of an electromagnetic wave in free space is given by Constant 7.6.

(7.6) C ≈ 9.84 × 108 f eet/second

Since electromagnetic waves travel slower through any cable, cable manufacturers normally specify
cable with a velocity factor (VF), which is a percentage of the speed of light in free space, and
characteristic of the specific cable. The velocity factor for the RG-6 cabling used by Arbiter Systems
for GPS antenna connections, is about 83% of C. Most transmission lines have velocity factors in
the range of 65% to 97%. Using these values you can determine the actual time delay in your cable
distribution system and compare it to your required accuracy. As an example, 840 feet of RG-6
cable (with a velocity factor of 83%) would delay the timing signal by one microsecond. For IRIG-B
timing applications, these delays may not be important, compared to other criteria. Otherwise,
you would be forced to compensate for the time delay using another method, such as advancing
the timing output or placing another master clock at the remote site.

7.4.9 Solutions
There are many solutions to providing an accurate timing signal to equipment in distant locations.
However, the most satisfying solution may not be to string cabling for hundreds of meters. The
costs associated with installing and maintaining cabling over a wide area may be unsatisfactory.
Since the GPS is so pervasive, it may prove to be less costly to install another clock at a distant
location, which would also improve accuracy and provide redundancy. Before installing cabling
over a wide area, be sure to first examine all the possibilities.
Chapter 8

Relay Contacts and Event Inputs

8.1 Relay Contacts, by Option

Model 1088B can supply relay contacts through installation of an optional accessory. Option 19
provides one Form C (SPDT) set of contacts that can be used for the Out-of-Lock function. Option
29 provides four additional timing outputs and has two solid-state relays available with output
multiple functions and +25/50 Vdc supplies. For additional information on relay specifications and
operation, please see Option 19 in Section C.15, and Option 29 in Section C.20.

8.2 Event Inputs

8.2.1 Event Timing Input

When configured for event timing, the 1088B can provide two input channels with 0.1 microsecond
resolution. These two channels are called Event A and Event B. Event A is primarily used for
synchronization via the RS-232 port with an external computer or other type of device. It may
also be used to time an external 5 V CMOS signal applied to J4; see Figure 5.1 and Section 5.2.2.
Event B may only be applied to J3 and must be a 5 V CMOS signal.

Data for individual recorded events can be recalled using either the Event/Deviation key or via the
RS-232C interface (see Section 9.2.2). Data for each event will be retained until it is retrieved using
one of these two methods. Thus, if no event data points are retrieved, recording will be suspended
when the total number of events per channel reaches 200. As soon as data is retrieved for a recorded
event, its address (001 - 200) is made available for data corresponding to a new incoming event.

8.2.2 Event Timing Latency

Event data are recorded using a high-speed capture circuit operating with a 4 MHz time-base.
Latency is limited by the interrupt processing speed of the clock’s microcontroller, which in turn
depends on its workload at the time the event is received. Since the workload varies from time
to time, latency likewise varies. However, response time will, in general, never be less than a few
hundred microseconds nor greater than 10 milliseconds.
66 Relay Contacts and Event Inputs

8.2.3 Deviation Measurement

Both Channel A and B inputs can also be configured to display measured event times as 1 pulse-
per-second (1 PPS) deviation measurements. The intended purpose of the deviation measurement
function is to allow comparison of an external 1–PPS signal to the clock’s internal 1–PPS signal.
The clock determines the mean time difference between the two signals, which can be displayed on
the front panel or read via the RS-232 Interface.

8.2.4 Measurement Principle

The measurement technique employed for 1–PPS Deviation uses the same time determination and
recording scheme used for Event Time measurement (refer to paragraph above), but makes the
assumption that the input signal is periodic and continuous. Also, the operation of the circular
memory buffer is modified somewhat, in that recording does not stop after the first 200 events; new
Event Data is given priority over existing data, and will overwrite it. Since the incoming signal
is at 1 Hz and the circular buffer holds 200 events per channel, each Event Time Record will be
overwritten once every 200 seconds.
Once every second, the processor looks at the most recent group of 16 events. When computing
deviation, it uses only the portion of the event data describing fractional seconds (e.g. values
between 0.0000000 and 0.9999999 seconds). By normalizing the 16 fractional-second values around
0.0000000, the range of results from the deviation computations will be centered on zero (-0.4999999
to +0.5000000 seconds). Statistical computations are then performed on the 16 values to determine
their Mean and Sigma (Standard Deviation) values, which are then displayed on the front panel or
output via RS-232.

8.2.5 Event Timer Input Channel Configuration

In order for the Model 1088B to receive a timing input, adjustments to both the hardware and
software configuration may be required. The hardware configuration is described in Section 5.2.2.

8.2.6 Firmware Setup

Reconfiguration of the firmware may also be required to allow measurement and display of event
time data and/or 1–PPS deviation. See Section 6.9 and Figure 6.17 for detail on configuring the
event/deviation parameters from the front panel. See Section 9.2.2 for details on using the RS-232C
interface to manage event/deviation recording.

8.2.7 Displaying Data

Event and deviation data can be accessed from either the front panel or via RS-232 com-
mands. The following paragraphs describe the steps required to access data using the front panel
EVENT/DEVIATION key. Press the EVENT/DEVIATION key and the display will enter a circu-
lar scroll. It begins by showing the data (if any is present) for Channel A, as previously configured
for event recording in Figure 6.17 and Section 9.2.2. The readout will display one of the records
(001 to 200) and associated event times, using the following format:

CH A EVENT #nnn TIME

ddd:hh:mm:[Link]
8.2 Event Inputs 67

Where: “nnn” = event number (001 to 200)

“ddd” = day of year of the event (1 to 366)
“hh” = hour of the event (00 to 23)
“mm” = minute of the event (00 to 59)
“[Link]” = second and fractional seconds of the event (e.g. 59.9999999)

Press the UP or DOWN key to scroll through all events presently stored in the event time buffer.
After exiting and re-entering the event display mode, the first event data displayed for a given
channel will correspond to the same event number as was last displayed for that channel. However,
the data itself may be changed if it has been overwritten.
To clear the event buffer, press the EVENT/DEVIATION key again, while viewing Event data.
This will cause the display to issue the following prompt:

CLEAR EVENT (A)?

UP=YES DOWN=NO

NOTE: If the event capture channel is not configured for event time recording, it will not display
the CLEAR EVENT prompt.
Clocks display the CLEAR EVENT prompt only if the event capture channel was previously
configured for event time recording. Press ENTER during this display to delete all of the records
in the event buffer, and to allow recording of new event times, starting with event number 001.
If the event capture channel is configured for 1–PPS Deviation, the readout will display the deviation
of the 1–PPS input signal. In this case, the readout display will have the format:

A 1 PPS ±[Link] µS
SIGMA: [Link] µS

Where:
1. The top number is the mean (average) value of the most recent 16 records in the event buffer,
and represents the mean deviation (in microseconds) of the measured 1–PPS signal from the
GPS 1–PPS signal. A negative number means the applied 1–PPS signal is early, i.e. before
on-time, and a positive number means it is late, i.e. after on-time.
2. The bottom number is the standard deviation (sigma) of the values of the 16 samples.

8.2.8 RS-232C Event Trapping

The event capture channel of the Model 1088B can be configured to capture one or more events via
the RS-232C Serial Interface. The time mark for a captured event will correspond to the leading
edge of the start bit of the first character in the RS-232C signal. This event mode can be both
armed and interrogated for data over the RS-232C interface, allowing automated synchronization
of an external computer or system.
68 Relay Contacts and Event Inputs

To perform event trapping via the RS-232C interface, the circuit must first be ARMED; that is,
made ready to receive an event trigger. Only one event may be captured after every arming, but
the events are stored sequentially in the event buffer in exactly the same manner as the normal
event time mode, thereby allowing up to 200 events to be recorded.

8.2.9 Event Trapping Setup

Configuring the clock to trap events (incoming data) on the RS-232C interface requires making the
configuration changes described in Section 5.2.2.
Arm the Event-Trapping circuit from the front panel using the SET RS-232 sub-menu from the
SETUP key. This menu also provides for configuration of communications port parameters (e.g.
baud rate, word length, etc.) to match those of the computer or equipment to be interfaced. The
following steps are required to arm the Event Trapping circuitry from the front panel:

1. Press the following keys in order; SETUP > ENTER > SETUP > SETUP. The display
should indicate the following:
SET A EVENT?

2. Press ENTER again and the display should indicate the following:
ARM A EVENT?
PRESS ENTER TO ARM

3. Press the ENTER button and the Event Input should be armed.

When the event occurs on the RS-232C port (i.e. the start bit of the next received character), the
event data can be reviewed in the event mode exactly as any normally captured event would be. To
capture further events, the circuit must be re-armed from the front panel or by using the RS-232
Command “AR.”
Note that received commands are viewed as complete when the final character in the command is
received. Control characters, such as carriage-return and line-feed, are ignored and may follow the
“AR” command, but the start bit of the next character after the “R” (even if a carriage return)
may trigger the event timer. For a complete list of RS-232C Event Mode commands, refer to
Section 9.2.2.
Chapter 9

Serial Communication and Command

Set

9.1 Introduction
The Model 1088B has one main RS-232C port, and one optional RS-232C port (Option 17A). These
are labeled RS-232C and Option RS-232C. When viewing the rear panel, the main port is nearest
the antenna connector and the optional port is to the left of the Standard I/O connectors. It is
important to note that neither the standard RS-232, nor the Option RS-232C port have an RS-485
function and neither RS-232C ports use flow control.
Use the two serial ports interchangeably for separate functions. You may wish to interrogate the
clock on one port for basic information (i.e to configure something) and at the same time be able
to have the second serial port broadcasting a specific time code to a meter. While most recent
substation equipment has standardized on the IRIG-B time code, some devices are designed to
receive ASCII data through the serial port. Another common serial-port function is to connect a
digital wall display to indicate the time.

9.2 Command Set

This section provides information for controlling and communicating with these clocks via the
RS-232C serial interface. All of the RS-232C commands are functionally grouped into similar
categories. For example, Section 9.2.1 lists all of the commands used to both set and retrieve the
date and time in one of the standard formats.
Each command name and syntax is highlighted in bold at the beginning of each definition. De-
tailed information used to interpret the commands and responses follows each command heading.
Sometimes the command is very short, such as the command to return the Local Time: TL. Other
commands require a prefix or suffix with the letter command to specify them, such as to broad-
cast: Bn, where n equals an integer specifying the broadcast. For example, the command to start
the ASCII Standard broadcast string at a rate of once per second, on Local time, from the main
RS-232C port is B1.
70 Serial Communication and Command Set

When a command requests information from a clock, it returns the most current data available.
Numeric data is returned as an ASCII string of numeric characters, with leading sign and embedded
decimal point as needed. Strings are normally terminated with carriage return and line feed char-
acters, however sometimes this is not the case. Enter any RS-232C command as written in these
tables without pressing ENTER. Characters are automatically entered when typed. If including
any of these commands in a programming sequence, do not include any carriage-return or line-feed
characters.
In this section, the syntax of each command follows the word “Command:” and is in bold font.
Please read the comments below each command as some commands include one or more commas
and in other cases a comma will separate multiple commands.
The following symbols and syntax are used:
C = Shorthand for carriage-return, line-feed
‘U’ = UTC Time
‘L’ = Local Time
‘soh’ = An ASCII character (start of header) = Hex 01
‘bel’ = An ASCII character = Hex 07
‘n’ = integer used for various numerical values (e.g. nnn in minutes)
‘yyyy’ = four digit year
‘ddd’ = Julian day-of-year
‘mm’ = month
‘hh’ = hour
‘mm’ = minute
‘ss’ = second

Underlines are used for clarity only and graphically represent the location of ASCII spaces.
9.2 Command Set 71

9.2.1 Broadcast Mode Commands

Broadcast Mode – INTERROGATE (Broadcast OFF)
Command: B0, O0
B0 deactivates the RS-232C broadcast mode (resets to interrogate mode) on the main RS-232C
port. O0 deactivates the RS-232C broadcast mode on the option RS-232C port.
Response: C
Broadcast Mode – ASCII STD
Command: B1, O1
B1 configures the clock to broadcast the time-of-day as ASCII standard data from the main RS-
232C port. O1 configures the clock to broadcast ASCII standard data from the option RS-232C
port.
Response: <soh>ddd:hh:mm:ss C
Broadcast Mode – VORNE STD
Command: B2, O2
B2 configures the clock to broadcast data formatted for Vorne large format time displays from the
main RS-232C port. O2 configures the clock to broadcast from the option RS-232C port Vorne-
formatted data. Refer to Arbiter Systems Application Note 103 for more information on using
large format displays with Arbiter Systems’ GPS clocks.

C
Response: 44hhmmss (UTC/Local Time)
C
55ddd (day of year)
C
11nn (out-of-lock time)
bel (bel = Hex 07; sounds at the end of the time code)
The number and order of strings returned depend upon options ordered with clock (for example,
see Option 28 in Appendix C, Options List, page 180):
Data is transmitted ahead of time, and the bel character is transmitted on time. When properly
configured, the Vorne displays update simultaneously upon receipt of the bel character.

Broadcast Mode – EVENT DATA

Command: B3, O3
B3 configures the clock to broadcast from the main RS-232C port any event data at the time it is
recorded. O3 configures the clock to broadcast from the option RS-232C port any event data at
the time it is recorded. Options 17 and 18 also broadcast events.

Response: (Local) mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:[Link] nnnAL (...BL) C

(UTC) mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:[Link] nnnAU (...BU) C
Where: nnn = event-buffer read index number
A = Channel A, B = Channel B
U = UTC Time, L = Local Time
72 Serial Communication and Command Set

Broadcast Mode – STATUS

Command: B4, O4
B4 configures the clock to broadcast any status data from the main RS-232C port when it changes.
O4 configures the clock to broadcast any status data from the option RS-232C port when it changes.
NOTE: When a valid fault is detected, the specific status fault is broadcast once (with Julian day,
and time) to the chosen serial port. When the fault clears, another message is sent describing the
cleared fault.

Response: ddd:hh:mm:ss I=nn:nn X=nn:nn C (Updates whenever the status changes.)

Where: I, Internal clock conditions

X, External clock conditions
nn:nn, Status byte(Hex).

The 2 digits preceding the colon describe the present condition of the instrument. The 2 digits
after the colon indicate the parameters, which have changed.

Bit Weight Fault Bit Weight Fault

0 1 OCXO Not Installed 4 16 Out-of-Lock
1 2 Stabilized (fault = 0) 5 32 Time Error
2 4 Power Supply Error* 6 64 VCXO Error**
3 8 IRIG Fault (External)* 7 128 Receiver Failure

Table 9.1: Fault Indications and Definitions

*requires Option 18, **out of bounds

9.2 Command Set 73

Broadcast Mode – EXT. ASCII

Command: B5, O5
B5 configures the clock to broadcast from the main RS-232C port, the time-of-day as ASCII data
using an extended format prefaced with a time quality indicator (Q). O5 configures the clock to
broadcast the same data from the option RS-232C port. The start bit of a carriage-return is
transmitted on time.

Response: C
Q yy ddd hh:mm:ss.000

Format: Q = Time quality indicator, and may be represented by:

= (a space, ASCII 32) meaning it is locked with maximum accuracy.
? = (ASCII 63) unlocked, accuracy not guaranteed
Underline graphically represents the location of an ASCII space
and is used for clarity only.

Broadcast Mode – ASCII plus QUAL

Command: B6, O6
B6 configures the clock to broadcast from the main RS-232C port the time-of-day as ASCII data
appended with a time quality indicator. O6 configures the clock to broadcast the same data from
the option RS-232C port. ASCII plus QUAL means Standard ASCII plus Time Quality Indicator.

Response: <soh>ddd:hh:mm:ssQ C
Format: soh = Hex 01 – the start bit of the soh character is transmitted on time.
Q = Time quality indicator. may be represented by:
= (a space, ASCII 32) locked, maximum accuracy
. = (ASCII 46) Error < 1 microsecond
* = (ASCII 42) Error < 10 microseconds
# = (ASCII 35) Error < 100 microseconds
? = (ASCII 63) Error > 100 microseconds
74 Serial Communication and Command Set

Broadcast Mode – YEAR plus ASCII

Command: B8, O8
B8 configures the clock to broadcast from the main RS-232C port, the year and time-of-day as
ASCII data appended with a time quality indicator. O8 configures the clock to broadcast from the
option RS-232C port. YEAR plus ASCII is the same as ASCII plus Time Quality Indicator adding
the four digit year to the beginning of the string.

Response: <soh>yyyy:ddd:hh:mm:ssQ C
Format: soh = Hex 01 – the start bit of the soh character is transmitted on time.
Q = Time quality indicator. may be represented by:
= (a space, ASCII 32) locked, maximum accuracy
. = (ASCII 46) Error < 1 microsecond
* = (ASCII 42) Error < 10 microseconds
# = (ASCII 35) Error < 100 microseconds
? = (ASCII 63) Error > 100 microseconds

Broadcast Mode - NMEA183GLL

Command: 0,nB
0,nB configures the clock to broadcast the National Marine Electronics Association Standard
(NMEA - 0183) to broadcast from the main RS-232C port, where n = the update rate in sec-
onds, from 1 to 9999.

GLL - Geographic Position, Latitude-Longitude

Latitude and Longitude of present vessel position, time of position fix and status.

Response: $–GLL,[Link],a,[Link],a,[Link],A C
Where: GLL Geographic Position, Latitude / Longitude
[Link] Latitude of position
a N or S
[Link] Longitude of position
a E or W
[Link] Time (hours, minutes, seconds, frac seconds) in UTC
A status: A = valid data
9.2 Command Set 75

Broadcast Mode - NMEA183ZDA

Command: 1,nB
1,nB configures the clock to broadcast the National Marine Electronics Association Standard
(NMEA - 0183) to broadcast ZDA format from the main RS-232C port, where n = the update rate
in seconds from 1 to 9999. ZDA, time and date, includes the UTC day, month, year, and local time
zone.
Response: $–ZDA,[Link],dd,mm,yyyy,xx,xx C
Where: ZDA Time and date
[Link] Time in UTC
dd Day, 01 to 31
mm Month, 01 to 12
yyyy Year
[Link] Local zone description, 00 to +/- 13 hours and minutes

9.2.2 Event Mode Commands

Return Specific Event
Command: nnnA, nnnB
nnnA sets the event buffer read index to a specific event number (0 to 199) for channel A, and nnnB
sets the event buffer read index to a specific event number (0 to 199) for channel B. It then returns
that event information in either Local or UTC time format depending on how the command, nTA
or nTB is configured.
Response: LCL mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:[Link] nnnAL (or ...BL) C
or
UTC mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:[Link] nnnAU (or ...BU) C
Format: nnn Event–Buffer Read Index Number
A Channel A
B Channel B
U UTC Time, Channel A or B.
L Local Time, channel A or B.

Set Event Channel Time

Command: nTA, nTB
nTA sets the channel A time source, and nTB sets the channel B time source, as either Local or
UTC, where n = 0 sets the event time to UTC and n = 1 sets the event time to Local.
Response: C
Set Channel – Deviation
Command: AD, BD
AD sets channel A, and BD sets channel B, to the 1-PPS deviation mode.
Response: C
76 Serial Communication and Command Set

Set Channel – Event

Command: AE, BE
AE sets channel A, and BE sets channel B, to the event recording mode.
Response: C
Clear Event Buffer
Command: CA, CB
CA clears the channel A, and CB clears the channel B, event buffer and then resets the read and
write indices to 0.
Response: C
Return Deviation for Event Channel
Command: DA, DB
DA and DB return the 1-PPS deviation and sigma for the event input for channel A and B respec-
tively.
Response: [Link] [Link] (Results are in microseconds)
Format: ’[Link]‘ = the deviation from 1 PPS (GPS), averaged over 16 samples
’[Link]‘ = the standard deviation (sigma) of samples

Arm Event Trigger

Command: AR
AR arms the RS-232C event capture circuitry.
Response: C
Return Single Event
Command: EA, EB
EA returns a single event record from the channel A event buffer, and EB returns a single event
record from the channel B event buffer. The record number (‘nnn’) increments once for every
issuance of this command.
Response: Local Time mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:[Link] nnAL (...BL) C
UTC time mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:[Link] nnnAU (...BU) C
Format: A = Channel A, B = Channel B
U = UTC time, Channel A
L = Local time, Channel A
NO DATA C (if buffer is empty)

Recorder - Channel A or B
Command: RA, RB
RA sets channel A, and RB sets channel B, recorder ±5 Volt analog output to follow 1 PPS
deviation.
Response: C
9.2 Command Set 77

9.2.3 Status Mode Commands

Return Status of Event/Deviation
Command: SA, SB
SA and SB return the event/deviation channel setup information for channels A and B respectively,
read index number and write index number.

Response: D(E), R = nnn, S = mmm C

Format: D indicates the input channel is in 1–PPS deviation mode
E indicates the input channel is in event mode
nnn = Channel read index (000 to 199)
mmm = Channel write index (000 to 199)

NOTE: When nnn = mmm, using the EA or EB command to read event data, the event buffer is
empty, i.e., all event data which has been recorded has also been read.

Return Clock Status

Command: SC
SC returns the current clock status.

Response: L/U, U=xx, S=nn C

Format:
L = Clock currently locked to GPS (U for unlocked).
xx = Indicates loss of lock period, up to 99 minutes.
nn = User specified out-of-lock delay, 00 to 99 minutes (refer to Table A-8).
S = Off if the out-of-lock function is deactivated, S = ZDL indicates zero delay.

Receiver Status
Command: SR
SR returns the current receiver status.

Response: V=vv S=ss T=t P=Off E=0 C

Format: vv = number of satellites, visible to the antenna, per almanac.
ss = relative signal strength (range: 0 to 255, nominal value = 15)
t = number of satellites being actively tracked (up to twelve)
P = Off, indicates that the time dilution of precision (TDOP)
calculation is not being performed. Returns 1.0 99.0, depending
on satellite geometry, when TDOP calculation is being performed.
A TDOP calculation is NOT performed if less than 3 satellites are
visible, OR if Position-Hold is active. E = 0, currently unused.
78 Serial Communication and Command Set

Survey Status
Command: SQ
SQ returns Auto-Survey mode data. For a survey in progress, it returns current status of the
survey. For a completed survey, it returns the final results of the survey, i.e. the averaged position.

Response: Sn Pm Fnnnn #nnnn Tyyyy:dd:hh:mm:ss Eddd:mm:[Link] Ndd:mm:[Link] [Link] C

Format: Sn = status of the Auto-Survey mode
Pm = status of the Position-Hold mode
Fnnnn = current number of fixes
#nnnn = total number of fixes required
yyyy:ddd:hh:mm:ss = completion time of the most recent average
Eddd:mm:[Link] = surveyed longitude East, (W = West)
Ndd:mm:[Link] = surveyed latitude North, (S = South)
[Link] = surveyed elevation

Table 9.2 columns on the left show the significant three bits of the Auto Survey status byte,
weighting and assignments. On the right, columns show the significant three bits of the Position
Hold status byte, weighting and assignments.

Bit Weight Function Bit Weight Function

0 (LSB) 1 Single Auto Survey 0 (LSB) 1 Position Hold Enabled
1 2 Power-On Survey 1 2 Position Hold Active
2 4 Suspend Survey 2 4 Position Hold ID: *
3–7 N/A – 3–7 N/A –

Table 9.2: Survey (Sn)/Position-Hold Status (Pm)

*0=surveyed, 1=User-entered
The remainder of the information is the running position average, including all fixes since the
beginning of the Auto Survey cycle. Gives latitude and longitude in degrees, minutes and seconds.
Indicates E, W, N, and S respectively as East or West longitude and North or South latitude, and
H indicating elevation in meters WGS–84 (World Geodetic Survey, 1984).
9.2 Command Set 79

System Status
Command: SS
SS returns the instrument operation status and Option 18 status (if installed) whenever the status
changes. See Table 9.1 for bit assignments of clock conditions.

Response: I=nn:nn X=nn:nn C (updates whenever status changes)

Format: I = internal clock conditions

X = external clock conditions
nn:nn = hexadecimal representations of the status byte.
The two digits preceding the colon describe present condition of the instrument.
The two digits after the colon indicate the parameters that have changed. See Table 9.3.

Bit Weight Function Bit Weight Function

0 (LSB) 1 OCXO Not Inst. (Set to 1) 4 16 Out of Lock
1 2 Stabilized (fault = 0) 5 32 Time Error
2 4 Power Supply Error* 6 64 VCXO Tune Error*
3 8 IRIG-B Fault (External)* 7 128 Receiver Failure

Table 9.3: System Status Information Chart

*requires Option 18

Time Quality
Command: TQ
TQ returns a single ASCII character (0, 4–9, A, B, F) indicating estimated worst-case time quality,
which follows the IEEE Standard, 1344. Table 9.4 gives the returned value and error category.
Response: hC
Where ‘h’ is described in Table 9.4 below.

Value Error Value Error

0 Locked, max. Accuracy 8 Unlocked, accuracy < 10 ms
4 Unlocked, < 1 us 9 Unlocked, < 100 ms
5 Unlocked, < 10 us A Unlocked, < 1 s
6 Unlocked, < 100 us B Unlocked, < 10 s
7 Unlocked, < 1 ms F Clock failure

Table 9.4: Unlocked Time Quality

80 Serial Communication and Command Set

9.2.4 Local/Daylight Savings Time Setup Commands

Return Daylight Saving/Summer Time Settings
Command: 0DT
0DT returns the current Daylight Saving / Summer Time Settings to the connected RS-232C port
(Modes: OFF, ON, or AUTO).
Response: Mode :AUTO C
START :02:00 Second SUN of MAR C
STOP :02:00 First SUN of NOV C

Set Daylight Saving/Summer Time Mode

Command: 1,mDT
1,mDT activates the Daylight Saving mode, where m = 0 – 2, with 0 = OFF, 1 = ON, and 2 =
AUTO. When OFF this time adjust feature does not add the specified offset to local time display
and output. With m = 1 (ON), the Daylight Saving / Summertime feature is always on. With m
= 2, the Daylight Saving / Summertime feature will automatically change at the specified dates
and times. To complete the Daylight Saving / Summer Time setup, you must also use the “Set
Daylight Saving Auto Start” and “Stop” commands that follow below.
Response: C
Set Daylight Saving/Summer Auto Start Time
Command: 2,w,x,y,zDT
2,w,x,y,zDT sets the starting (Start) date and time for Daylight Saving / Summer Time AUTO
setting.
Where: w = Month (0 through 11), with 0 = Jan, 1 = Feb, ... 11 = Dec.
x = WeekOfMonth (0 through 5), with 0 = First, 1 = Second, 2, = Third,
3 = Last, 4 = Second from Last, and 5 = Third from Last.
y = DayOfWeek (0 through 6), with 0 = Sun, 1 = Mon, . . . , 6 = Sat.
z = Minutes after midnight z (0 through 1440).
Response: C
Set Daylight Saving/Summer Auto Stop Time
Command: 3,w,x,y,zDT
3,w,x,y,zDT sets the ending (Stop) date and time for Daylight Saving / Summer Time AUTO
setting.
Where: w = Month (0 through 11), with 0 = Jan, 1 = Feb, ... 11 = Dec.
x = WeekOfMonth (0 through 5), with 0 = First, 1 = Second, 2, = Third,
3 = Last, 4 = Second from Last, and 5 = Third from Last.
y = DayOfWeek (0 through 6), with 0 = Sun, 1 = Mon, . . . , 6 = Sat.
z = Minutes after midnight z (0 through 1440).
Response: C
9.2 Command Set 81

Local Offset Command

Command: ±hh:[mm]L
±hh:[mm]L sets the local offset in hours and fifteen-minute increments from -12:00 to +12:00, where
‘hh’ and ‘mm’ equal the number of hours and minutes, positive (East) or negative (West).
Response: C
9.2.5 Front Panel Control Commands
Disable Control Panel
Command: FB
FB disables all control–panel keys and blanks the front panel display.
Response: C
Enable Control Panel
Command: FE
FE enables all control–panel keys and activates the front panel display.
Response: C
Lock Setup Keys
Command: FL
FL disables setup control keys and activates the front panel display.
Response: C
Set Backlight – OFF
Command: L0
L0 disables the backlight operation with Option 01 installed.
Response: C
Set Backlight – ON
Command: L1
L1 selects the continuous backlight operation with Option 01 installed.
Response: C
Set Backlight – AUTO
Command: L2
L2 enables the automatic backlight operation with Option 01 installed. It keeps the backlight active
for 30 seconds after any key is pressed.
Response: C
82 Serial Communication and Command Set

9.2.6 IRIG-B Data Output Commands

IRIG Data − IEEE 1344
Command: In
In activates (n=1) or deactivates (n=0) the IEEE 1344 extension, which uses IRIG-B control
bits for additional information. Information includes the two-digit year, local offset, time quality
and notification of pending non-sequence events such as leap seconds and daylight saving time
changeovers. For additional information, see Section 7.3.3.
Response: C
IRIG Data − Local
Command: IL
IL configures all IRIG time data outputs to local time code reference.
Response: C
IRIG Data − UTC
Command: IU
IU configures all IRIG time data outputs to UTC time code reference.
Response: C
9.2 Command Set 83

9.2.7 Position Data Commands

Set Position Hold − Elevation
Command: [Link]
[Link] command sets the antenna elevation in meters MSL (mean sea level); fractional
meters of elevation are optional.
Response: C
Format: [Link]
M = meters
m = fractional meters

Set Position Hold − Latitude

Command: dd:mm:[Link](S)
dd:mm:[Link](S) sets antenna latitude (in Position-Hold Mode) in degrees, minutes and seconds,
North or South. Position Hold must be enabled to set position.
Response: C
Format: dd = degrees
mm = minutes
[Link] = seconds (fractional seconds, optional)
N = North (S for South)

Set Position Hold − Longitude

Command: ddd:mm:[Link](W)
ddd:mm:[Link](W) sets antenna longitude (in Position-Hold Mode) in degrees, minutes and sec-
onds, East or West. Position Hold must be enabled to set position.
Response: C
Format: ddd = degrees
mm = minutes
[Link] = seconds (fractional seconds, optional)
E = East (W for West)

Return Elevation
Command: LH
LH returns the current antenna elevation. In Position Hold mode, ‘LH’ returns the current position-
hold elevation setting. In Fix mode, LH returns the most recent computed elevation value (calcu-
lated each second). Elevation is referenced to the WGS-84 datum.
Response: [Link] C (from -1000.00 to +18000.00 meters WGS-84)
84 Serial Communication and Command Set

Return Latitude
Command: LA
LA returns the current antenna latitude. In Position Hold mode, LA returns the current position-
hold latitude setting. In Fix mode, LA returns the most recent computed latitude value (calculated
each second).
Response: Ndd:mm:[Link] C
Format: N = North (S for South)
dd = degrees
mm = minutes
[Link] = seconds (fractional seconds)

Return Longitude
Command: LO
LO returns the current antenna longitude. In Position Hold mode, LO returns the current position-
hold longitude setting. In Fix mode, LO returns the most recent computed longitude value (calcu-
lated each second).
Response: Wddd:mm:[Link] C
Format: W = West (E for East)
ddd = degrees
mm = minutes
[Link] = seconds (fractional seconds)

Position–Hold – OFF
Command: PH0
PH0 deactivates the Position–Hold timing mode. The receiver resumes computing time and position
solutions approximately each second. This is referred to as the Fix mode.
Response: C
Position–Hold – ON
Command: PH1
PH1 activates the Position–Hold timing mode. In this mode, the receiver position is held fixed
and each channel is used to compute a timing solution. These solutions are averaged together,
resulting in reduced timing noise due to to Selective Availability and RF channel noise. To operate
properly, the position used by the receiver must be fairly accurate. Due to the risk that previously
stored position data may be inaccurate, exercise caution when activating the Position–Hold mode
without either performing an Auto Survey or getting the position directly. Failure to observe these
precautions may result in serious timing errors.
Response: C
9.2 Command Set 85

Position hold position information is set using the Set Position Hold RS-232 commands, the front-
panel Edit Position Hold function, or the Auto-Survey function.

9.2.8 Survey Mode Commands

Auto Survey Mode Selection
Command: m,nQ
m,nQ sets the mode (m) and number of fixes to average (n). Used to automatically determine
position data for Position–Hold. Requires Position–Hold mode to be ON to start the survey. See
conditions in Table 9.5. Use the SQ command during a survey to obtain the survey status. Activate
the Position–Hold mode with the PH1 command.
Response: C
m Condition
0 Survey Off
1 Initiate single auto survey
2 Perform auto survey at power on
3 Temporarily suspend auto survey
4 Resume suspended auto survey
n Condition
0 Single Position
1 60 fixes (1 min.)
2 300 fixes (5 min.)
3 900 fixes (15 min.)
4 1800 fixes (30 min.)
5 3600 fixes (1 hour)
6 7200 fixes (2 hours)
7 14400 fixes (4 hours)
8 28800 fixes (8 hours)
9 43200 fixes (12 hours)
10 86400 fixes (24 hours)

Table 9.5: Auto Survey Setup Conditions

86 Serial Communication and Command Set

9.2.9 Date and Time Commands

Set Receiver Time
Command: yyyy:mm:dd:hh:mmTS
TS sets the receiver time to the entered value (UTC format), only when not locked to the GPS. The
command is ignored when locked to satellites. When the receiver is initially activated, and has not
locked onto satellites, acquisition time may be improved by giving the clock an initial estimate of
UTC time, which it can use (with stored position and almanac data) to determine which satellites
and Doppler shifts to use in acquisition.

Response: C
Format: yyyy = year
mm = month
dd = day
hh = hour
mm = minute

Return Local Date

Command: DL
DL returns the current date, in the Local time zone.
Response: ddmmmyyyy C
Return UTC Date
Command: DU
DU returns the current date, in the UTC time zone.
Response: ddmmmyyyy C
Return Local Time
Command: TL
TL returns the current Local time.
Response: ddd:hh:mm:ss C
Return UTC Time
Command: TU
TU returns current UTC time.

Response: ddd:hh:mm:ss C
9.2 Command Set 87

NOTE: The DL, DU, TL and TU command formats are identified as follows:
yyyy = year
hh = hour
mmm = month (JAN DEC)
mm = minute
dd = day of month
ss = second
ddd = day of year

9.2.10 Programmable Pulse Output Commands

Pulse Width
Command: [Link]
[Link] configures the Programmable Pulse output pulse width in seconds, from 0.01 to 600
seconds, in Seconds per Pulse, Pulse per Hour and Pulse per Day modes.
Response: C
Format: [Link] (0.01 to 600 seconds in 10-millisecond increments).
For values greater than 1, use a decimal point and enter trailing zeros as applicable.
Examples:
1 = 0.01 second
10 = 0.10 second
1.00 = 1 second
100 = 1 second

Seconds Per Pulse / Pulse Per Hour

Command: m,nPS
m,nPS configures the programmable pulse as “Seconds per Pulse” or “Pulse Per Hour” mode as
follows:
Response: C
Format: m = 0, seconds–per–pulse mode
m = 1, pulse–per–hour mode
n = 1 – 60000 seconds if seconds–per–pulse mode
n = 1 – 3599 seconds offset from hour if pulse–per–hour mode

For the Seconds–Per–Pulse mode, the first pulse will be on time at the top of the minute. If n is
divisible by 60, the first pulse will be on time at the top of the hour.
For the Pulse–Per–Hour mode, the pulse will be on time at the second after the hour described by
n. For example, 1,1200ps would cause a pulse at exactly 20 minutes after the hour.
If only one number is present then the number sets the seconds as in seconds–per–pulse mode.
88 Serial Communication and Command Set

Set Alarm Time Mark

Command: ddd:hh:mm:ss(.ss)OU(OL)
OU sets the time at which the clock issues the programmable pulse, in the UTC format. OL sets
the time at which the clock issues the programmable pulse, in the Local format. If ddd is set to
0, the pulse will repeat daily at the specified time. If ddd is set from 001 to 366, the output pulse
will be generated at the next occurrence of the specified time and date.

Response: C
Format: ddd = day of year (1 through 366)
hh = hour (0 through 23)
mm = minute (0 through 59)
ss = second (0 through 59)
(.ss) = fractional seconds in 0.01 increments (00 through 99)
OU = UTC time (OL for Local time)

Set Pulse Output to Slow Code

Command: nCM
nCM configures the pulse output to slow code. Slow Code pulse output is held high and goes low
for six seconds on the day, four seconds on the hour and two seconds on the minute.

Response: C
Format: n = 0, Slow Code off
n = 1, UTC Slow Code
n = 2, Local Slow Code

Set Pulse Polarity

Command: nPP
nPP sets the programmable pulse output polarity (i.e. TTL/CMOS high or low), where n = 0
sets pulse polarity to positive, and n = 1 sets the pulse polarity to negative. Positive means that
the output voltage is held low until the beginning of the pulse period, at which time it transitions
high. Negative means that the output voltage is held high until the beginning of the pulse period,
at which time it transitions low.
Response: C
9.2 Command Set 89

9.2.11 Antenna System Delay Commands

Set Antenna Delay

Command: nnnnnnDA
nnnnnnDA sets antenna system delay compensation value. NOTE: Factory default setting for the
standard 15-meter (50-foot) cable is 60 ns. Time range is from 0 to 999999 nanoseconds. The exact
syntax for a 60-ns delay is 60DA. See Section 4.4.1 for information on calculating cable delay.

Response: C
Set Clock Offset

Command: nnnnnnnnnDS
nnnnnnnnnDS sets internal system delay compensation value. This includes the remote receiver
cable delay. It is also used to advance the output pulse by an arbitrary offset of zero up to one
millisecond, from actual time.

Response: C
9.2.12 Out-of-Lock Commands
Set Out-of-Lock Time

Command: (-)nnK
(-)nnK configures the amount of delay time (in minutes) following loss of satellite synchronization
before an out–of–lock signal is generated and output via rear panel connector. A negative number
turns the out-of-lock function OFF. n = 0 sets the out-of-lock time to zero delay. n = 1 to 99 sets
the amount of delay time (in minutes).

Response: C
9.2.13 Miscellaneous Commands
Return Firmware Version

Command: V
V returns the firmware version date of the installed ROM.

Response: dd mmm yyyy C

Return Display Buffer

Command: Z
Z returns the contents of Display Buffer.

Response: Echoes current display (40 characters); no line wrap. For display contents, see Chap-
ter 10, Startup and Basic Operation.
90 Serial Communication and Command Set

Set Option Control

Command: m,n,k,lXI
m,n,k,lXI configures the specified option in the clock, where m = 0 for option Slot A and m = 1
for the option Slot B. See Table 9.6.

Where:
m = 0 for option Slot A, and m = 1 for option Slot B.
n = option number (see table below)
k = security key; 1088
l = use only if n specifies Option 28. l = 0 for 60 Hz and l = 1 for 50 Hz.

Response: C
Option Number, n Slot A Option Slot B Option
0 NONE NONE
1 3 4
2 10 17
3 11 17A
4 12 18
5 13 23
6 14 24
7 20A 27
8 23 29
9 25 32
10 28 33
11 – 34
12 – 35

Table 9.6: Option Control Settings

Note: There is no clock configuration or indication for Option 19, Out-of-Lock Relay.

Option Control Examples

Example 1 – Model 1088B, Slot A Option 28
0,10,1088,0XI
Note: the 0 before XI in the last command sets the Option 28 frequency to 60 Hz.
Example 2 – Model 1088B, Slot B Option 32
1,9,1088XI
9.3 Communication Port Information 91

Return IP/MAC Address

Command: IP
This command returns the IP and MAC addresses of both ports of the Option 34. Dashes are used
to show either an unassigned or unconnected port IP address.
Response: NET1: [Link] [Link] C
Response: NET2: ---.---.---.--- [Link] C

9.3 Communication Port Information

Table 9.7 gives a list of functions and associated pins for the RS-232C port. For the optional RS-232
port, see Option 17A in Appendix C.

Pin No. Function Pin No. Function

1 Not Connected 6 Not Connected
2 RS-232, Rx Data 7 Not Connected
3 RS-232, Tx Data 8 Aux. Input
4 Aux. Output 9 Not Connected
5 Ground – –

Table 9.7: Main RS-232C Port Pin Definitions

92 Serial Communication and Command Set
Chapter 10

Startup and Basic Operation

10.1 Initial Startup Sequence

Before powering ON any of these clock models, make sure that the chassis cover is installed and if
equipped with a power switch, that inlet power is properly connected to the power inlet connector.
If the clock does not have a power switch, then the clock will begin the startup sequence when inlet
power is connected to the rear panel. When power is switched ON, the normal startup sequence
follows approximately as listed below:

• All the annunciator LED’s should illuminate, then all but the OPERATE, ON LINE and
UNLOCKED LED should extinguish.

• The LCD should display several introductory messages – see below.

• The Out-of-Lock Relay (if so equipped) will be in the out-of-lock (faulted) position.

• Eventually, the UNLOCKED LED should extinguish.

• If equipped, the out-of-lock relay should change to the locked (non-faulted) position in sync
with the out-of-lock LED.

• The LCD STATUS should indicate that the clock is Locked and in Position Hold.

10.1.1 Clock Time, Startup Mode

When the clock first starts, it will not indicate the correct time until it is locked to the GPS.
Pressing the TIME key before the UNLOCKED LED is extinguished will produce the message:

TIME NOT AVAILABLE

For IRIG-B time, it will begin counting from zero, with the Julian Day also set to zero. This
method was chosen so that there would be no mistake in interpreting that the clock was in startup
mode. For example, the time could indicate as follows:
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
.
94 Startup and Basic Operation

[Link]
[Link] (these values chosen for illustrative purposes only)
During a short period of time (from a few minutes to a few seconds) the displayed clock time may
jump and add or lose some seconds as more satellites are acquired. This is normal, until the full set
of ephemeris data is received by the GPS receiver from the GPS (satellites), when the time will be
accurate. At this time, the Out-of-Lock LED should extinguish and the Out-of-Lock relay close.

10.2 Front Panel Indication

10.2.1 Display Indication at Startup
In the startup sequence, the LCD display should indicate clock status as follows:

ARBITER SYSTEMS GPS

SUBSTATION CLOCK
followed by:
COPYRIGHT (C) 2006
ARBITER SYSTEMS, INC.
followed by:
CLOCK STATUS
STARTUP
followed by:
CLOCK STATUS
UNLOCKED – MIN
followed by:
CLOCK STATUS
NOT STABILIZED

After this, the second line of the status display should change to UNLOCKED, or LOCKED
depending on the previous operation, inactivity or if the clock has been moved. During startup,
the Unlocked LED should extinguish after the GPS receiver begins tracking satellites.

10.2.2 Other Display Indications When Unlocked

Time Display TIME NOT AVAILABLE

Position Display POSITION

NOT AVAILABLE

Event Display PLEASE WAIT!

TIME ADJUSTMENTS

Status Display GPS RECEIVER STATUS

TRACKING: 00
10.2 Front Panel Indication 95

10.2.3 Status Display Indications

Display indications when successively pressing the STATUS key are as follows:

CLOCK STATUS
STARTUP*

*The second line will change between STARTUP, to UNLOCKED (with time),
to NOT STABILIZED, to LOCKED–AUTO SURVEY, to LOCKED–POSITION HOLD.
followed by:
GPS RECEIVER STATUS
TRACKING: 00*

*The number of tracked satellites can change to integer values from 0 to 12.

10.2.4 Event/Deviation Display

There are separate displays when pressing the EVENT/DEVIATION key that depend on how the
feature is configured. Successive events appear when repeatedly pressing the EVENT/DEVIATION
key, or if configured for DEVIATION, it will indicate the 1-PPS Deviation (updates once per second)
and Sigma. If there are no records, the second line will indicate ”NO DATA”.
Event Display

Ch A EVENT nnn
ddd:hh:[Link]
Where:
nnn = event number(001 to 200)
ddd = day of year of the event(1 to 366)
hh = hour of the event(00 to 23)
mm = minute of the event(00 to 59)
[Link] = second and fractional seconds of the event

Deviation Display

1PPS: 0.00 uS
SIGMA: 0.00 uS

The 1088B displays the following indication if you have configured Channel A or B for event input,
and not 1-PPS Deviation.

Clear Event (A)?

Press the ENTER key to clear the event channel.

96 Startup and Basic Operation

10.2.5 IRIG-B Time Data

IRIG-B time is immediately sent out, when the clock is powered ON, from any timing output
port configured for IRIG-B as indicated above. Time will not be accurate until the Unlocked LED
extinguishes.

10.3 Clock Status Display Modes & Fault Table

When first applying power to the clock, the display will indicate several startup messages, then
will revert to Clock Status mode condition called STARTUP. After a short time, while the GPS
receiver begins collecting data from the GPS, it will indicate either UNLOCKED (XX Min), NOT
STABILIZED, LOCKED–AUTO SURVEY, or LOCKED–POSITION HOLD. There are several
faults that are indicated, if they exist, and are as follows:

Bit Weight Function

0 1 OCXO Not Installed (set to 1)
1 2 Stabilized (fault = 0)
2 4 Power Supply Error
3 8 IRIG BUS Fault (was Opt. 18)
4 16 Out of Lock
5 32 Time Error
6 64 VCXO Error (out of bounds)
7 128 Receiver Failure

Table 10.1: Fault Conditions

For additional information on internal faults, please see Chapter 2, Front and Rear Panels, and
Chapter 9, Serial Communications and Command Set, status commands, page 72.

10.4 Time Display Modes

After establishing GPS satellite synchronization, date and time information can be displayed on
the front panel by pressing the TIME key and scrolling through the four available displays. Press
this key to select the time display mode (UTC or Local) time data (Date/Time or Day of Year).

10.4.1 Date and Time Display, Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)

The Date and Time Display UTC mode displays UTC, in the Date and Time format, as maintained
by the United States Naval Observatory (USNO), as described below:

UTC DATE/TIME www

dd mmm yyyy hh:mm:ss
Where:
10.4 Time Display Modes 97

www = day of the week (Mon - Sun)

dd = day of the month
mmm = month (Jan - Dec)
yyyy = the year
hh = the hour (00 - 23)
mm = the minute (00 - 59)
ss = the second (00 - 59)

This mode displays UTC, Time of Year mode, without the application of daylight saving correction
and local offset.

10.4.2 Time of Year Display, UTC

The Time of Year Display mode also displays UTC, in Time of Year format, which differs from the
previous format as follows:

UTC DATE/TIME www

yyyy ddd:hh:mm:ss
Where:
ddd = day of the year (001 - 366)

This mode displays UTC, Time of Year mode, without the application of daylight saving correction
and local offset. NOTE: Daylight saving and local offset have no effect on this display.

10.4.3 Date and Time Display, Local Time

The Date and Time Display mode displays the date and time after the daylight-saving correction
and local offset have been applied, but in the same format as that of the Date and Time, UTC:

LOCAL DATE/TIME www

dd mmm yyyy hh:mm:ss

10.4.4 Time of Year Display, Local Time

The Time of Year Display mode displays the time of year after the daylight-saving correction and
local offset have been applied, but in the same format as that of the Time of Year, UTC:

LOCAL DATE/TIME www

yyyy ddd:hh:mm:ss

NOTE: Unless the daylight saving and local offset parameters have been set properly, this display
may not reflect the correct local time.
98 Startup and Basic Operation

10.4.5 Daylight Saving/Summer Time

The Daylight Saving / Summer Time (DST) configuration feature allows expanded settings. The
addition of AUTO allows the user to customize the DST/Summertime settings to match the re-
quirements of locations in either Northern or Southern latitudes. For setup information through
the front–panel interface, please see Section 6.3.1.
The DST/Summertime configuration can be changed through the serial port or through the front
panel keypad. For setup information through the RS-232C port, please see Section 9.2.4.

10.5 Position Display Modes

When the clock is first powered ON and acquiring satellites, the only position information available
is the previous position, stored in the clocks setup EEPROM. This position information reflects the
location of the receiver as determined by the last position while locked to at least four satellites.
Displayed position will be based on the most recent position fix.
Press the POSITION key to access longitude, latitude, and elevation data values. By repeatedly
pressing the POSITION key the display will continuously scroll through these values. If pressed
prior to acquisition of enough satellites to accurately determine and update position data, these
numbers will reflect the receiver’s power-on defaults.
Synchronization to a minimum of four satellites is necessary for precise determination of longitude,
latitude, and elevation. When meeting this minimum satellite lock requirement, POSITION values
will accurately correspond to the present antenna location.

10.5.1 Longitude Display

ANTENNA LONGITUDE
XXX◦ XX’ [Link]” W*
Where:
*W = WEST, or E = EAST

10.5.2 Latitude Display

ANTENNA LATITUDE
XX◦ XX’ [Link]” N*
Where:
*N = NORTH, or S = SOUTH

10.5.3 Elevation Display

ANTENNA ELEVATION
[Link] m WGS-84

Where the elevation is displayed referenced to the WGS-84 datum.

Appendix A

Technical Specifications and

Operating Parameters

A.1 Scope
Information in this section includes specifications relating to the physical and operational charac-
teristics of the standard Model 1088B Satellite Controlled Clock. Topics included in this section
are Receiver Characteristics, I/O Configuration, System Interface(s), Antenna System, Operator
Interface(s), and Physical Specifications.
NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

A.2 Receiver Characteristics

A.2.1 Input Signal
• GPS L1 C/A code, 1575.42 MHz.

A.2.2 Timing Accuracy

• GPS/UTC time ±50 ns rms (at 1-PPS output), when receiving 4 or more satellites (one
satellite if position is known within 25 meters) in the presence of Selective Availability (SA).
• < 40 ns, typical in Position–Hold mode

A.2.3 Internal Oscillator, Stability

• Standard: DCXO, 1 ×10−6 , typical

A.2.4 Position Accuracy (rms)

• 10 meters, rms, 90% confidence
• 25 meters, SA (USA Department of Defense Selective Availability) OFF,
• 100 meters, SA ON.
• Elevation, 140 meters, SA on
100 Technical Specifications and Operating Parameters

A.2.5 Satellite Tracking

• 12 channels, C/A code (1575.42 MHz)
The receiver simultaneously tracks up to twelve satellites. Results from all tracked satellites are
averaged in Position-Hold Mode or, with Position-Hold Off, are determined by least-squares esti-
mation.

A.2.6 Acquisition
• 150 seconds typical, cold start
• 15 minutes, 90% confidence, cold start
• 40 seconds, typical, with almanac < 1 month old
• 15 seconds, typical, with ephemeris < 4 hours old

A.3 I/O Configuration

Output signals, or the designated input, may be selected on specified connector by means of internal
push-on jumpers. Each output connector is independently buffered.

A.3.1 I/O Connectors

Standard I/O connectors may be configured to any one of the output signals listed in Section A.3.2
below, or a specific input function as listed, or any function listed in additional outputs as listed
in the option list in Appendix C.
• Signals on standard outputs, four BNC user configurable
• Option 03, adds four additional configurable outputs; Option 27 adds eight, high-drive IRIG-B
outputs; Option 29 adds four additional configurable outputs with 75 mA per channel.

A.3.2 Standard Output Signals

• IRIG-B: 1 kHz modulated, 10 Vpp
• IRIG-B, D, E, or H: 5 V CMOS
• 1 PPS, 1 PPM, 1 PPH: 5 V CMOS
• 10, 50, 60, or 100 PPS: 5 V CMOS
• 1, 10, or 100 kPPS: 5 V CMOS
• 1, 5, 10 MPPS: 5 V CMOS
• 5 V CMOS
• 1-PPS deviation (chart recorder): ±5 V at 10 µs/v
• IRIG-B Modified Manchester (IEEE Std 1344)
• Out of Lock: 5 V CMOS (HI = Locked, LO = Unlocked)
• Programmable Pulse, user-selectable: 5 V CMOS
• CMOS outputs are buffer type (74HC126) with 47-ohm source resistors
• Analog outputs are op-amp (LF353) followers with 557-ohm protective resistors

A.3.3 Input Functions

• Event A/1-PPS Input: 5 V TTL/CMOS
• Event B/1-PPS Input: 5 V TTL/CMOS
• External Timebase Input: 100 kHz, 1, 5, or 10 MHz
A.4 Antenna System 101

• Units with S/N of A119 and below: 5 V TTL/CMOS

• Units with S/N of A120 and above: AC- or DC-Coupled signals with a slew rate of 10 V/µ
minimum and level of 5 Vpp maximum
• Uncomitted input for special configurations
User configurable outputs are 5-V CMOS bus drivers with 47-Ohm source impedance and ±18-mA
drive capability.

A.3.4 Event Inputs

• These inputs have 100-ns timing resolution and can record up to 200 sequential events, pro-
vided that the events are separated by at least 11 milliseconds. Read the event log later from
either the front panel or RS-232 interface. A command is also provided to clear the event log.
Event data is stored in battery-backed RAM.
• The Event A and B inputs may also be configured to accept an external 1-PPS signal, and
measure the deviation from 1 PPS/GPS with 100-ns resolution.

A.3.5 Programmable Pulse Output

1. Seconds-per-pulse; repetitive pulse, every 1 − 60,000 seconds
2. Pulse-per-hour: every 0 − 3599 seconds after the hour
3. Pulse per day; at the specified hour, minute, seconds and fractional seconds
4. Single Trigger; output transitions at the specified day, hour, minute, second and fraction
second, and remains at that voltage
5. Slow Code − UTC, LCL; transitions for 6 seconds on the day, four seconds on the hour and
two seconds on the minute
6. Pulse Polarity: positive and negative; positive: held low and transitions high, or negative:
held high and transitions low.

A.3.6 Synchronization
• For a received data message, the leading edge of the start bit may be selected to trigger the
Event A input, providing synchronization with 100-ns resolution.

A.4 Antenna System

The included antenna is directly mounted on a 26-mm pole (1.05-in. OD or 3/4-in. ID pipe), with
either a standard 1-in. – 14 (approximately M25.4 x 1.81) marine-mount thread or a 3/4-in. NPT
pipe thread. Other mounting configurations are available (contact Arbiter Systems).
• GPS Antenna Assembly, 3/4-in. Pipe Thread Mount, 35 dB gain; Operates on 5 Vdc.
• Optional Antenna Mounting Bracket available to mount on 60-mm (2-in. nominal) pipe (p/n
AS0044600, see Figure 4.2).
• Pole mount (2 inch, 55-mm max. diameter) using AS0044600 mounting kit.

A.4.1 Antenna Cable

• 15-meter (50-foot) cable included with antenna.
• Other cable styles and lengths available see Table 4.2.
102 Technical Specifications and Operating Parameters

A.5 Operator Interface

A.5.1 Setup Methods
• Via RS-232C Interface
• 8 Front-panel keys

A.5.2 Setup Functions

Initial Position System Delays Auto Survey

RS-232 Parameters Programmable Pulse Position Hold
Local Hour IRIG Time Data Option Control
Out-of-Lock Indication Event/Deviation –
Backlight Frequency Reference –

Table A.1: Setup Functions Listed

A.5.3 Display
• 2-line by 20-character supertwist LCD
• Backlight available (Option 01)

A.5.4 Display Functions

• Time: UTC or Local
• 1PPS (input) Deviation
• Position: Latitude, Longitude and Elevation
• Event Time
• Status: Clock, GPS Receiver
• Configuration

A.5.5 Annunciators
• Operate (Green)
• On line (Green)
• Unlocked (Red)
• Fault (Red)
• Internal Battery
– Charge (Green)
– In Use (Green)
– LO Battery (Red)
A.6 System Interface 103

A.6 System Interface

A.6.1 RS-232C Interface

Pin No. Function Pin No. Function

1 Not Connected 6 Note Connected
2 RS-232, Rx Data 7 Not Connected
3 RS-232, Tx Data 8 Auxiliary Input
4 Auxiliary Output 9 Not Connected
5 Ground – –

Table A.2: Main RS-232 Port Pin Definitions

Communication Parameters
• Selectable, 300 − 19,200 baud, 7 or 8 data bits, 1 or 2 stop bits, odd/even/no parity
• Supports all keyboard functions

A.6.2 Broadcast Data Formats

Supports continuous output data in the following formats:
<SOH>ddd:hh:mm:ss<CRLF> Broadcast Mode, ASCII
44hhmmss<CRLF> 55ddd<CRLF><BEL> Broadcast Mode, Vorne
mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:[Link] nnn <CRLF> Broadcast Mode, Event
ddd:hh:mm:ss I=nn:nn X=nn:nn <CRLF> Broadcast Mode, Status
<CRLF> Q yy ddd hh:mm:ss.000 (space) Broadcast Mode, Extended ASCII
<SOH> ddd:hh:mm:ssQ <CRLF> Broadcast Mode, ASCII w/Time Quality
<SOH> yyyy:ddd:hh:mm:ssQ <CRLF> Broadcast, ASCII, year w/Time Quality

For more information refer to RS-232 Broadcast Commands contained in Section 9.2.1.

A.7 Physical Specifications

A.7.1 Dimensions
• Instrument: 430-mm W x 44-mm H x 280-mm D (16.9-in. x 1.7-in. x 11.0-in.)
• Antenna: 77-mm diameter x 66-mm height (3.05-in. x 2.61-in.)

A.7.2 Weight
• 2.0 kg (4.4 lbs.) net. (Instrument)
• 2.2 kg (4.84 lbs.) net. (Antenna and Cable)
• 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs.) net. (Option 06)
• 5.5 kg (12 lbs.) includes antenna, cables, and accessories. (Shipping)
104 Technical Specifications and Operating Parameters

A.7.3 Power Requirements

The Model 1088B can be ordered with one of five user-specified internal power supplies. Addition-
ally, the antenna receives power through the antenna cable connected to the Type F connector on
the rear panel.
• Standard: IEC-320 power inlet connector, 85 − 264 Vac, 47 − 440 Hz, or 110 − 350 Vdc, <
20 W typical
• Option 07: 85 – 264 Vac, 47 − 440 Hz, or 110 − 350 Vdc, < 20 W typical. Uses a three-
position terminal strip in place of the IEC-320 power inlet module.
• Option 08: 10 – 60 Vdc (DC only), < 20 W typical. Uses a three-position terminal strip in
place of the IEC-320 power inlet module.
• Option 15A: 110 – 170 Vdc, < 20 VA or 85 – 264 Vac, 47 – 440 Hz, with three-position
Terminal Power Strip and Surge-Withstand Capability (110 – 170 Vdc)
• Option 15B: 110 – 300 Vdc, < 20 VA or 85 – 264 Vac, 47 – 440 Hz, with three-position
Terminal Power Strip and Surge-Withstand Capability (110 – 300)

A.7.4 Power Connector

• Standard Power Supply: This includes a fused IEC-320 power inlet module with mating ac
cord. Plug type specified as Options P1 through P10 (see Section 3.2.1).
• Options 07, 08, 15A and 15B: Using a 3-pole terminal strip power inlet, and 15A/15B with
Surge-Withstand Capability.

A.7.5 Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI)

• Conducted Emissions: power supply (Options 07 and 08) comply with FCC 20780, Class A
and VDE 0871/6.78, Class A
• Surge Withstand Capability (SWC), power inlet (Options 15A and 15B) designed to meet
ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1 and IEC 801-4.

A.7.6 Temperature and Humidity

Temperature Operating Storage

Instrument 0 to 50◦ C -40 to 75◦ C
Antenna -40 to 85◦ C -55 to 100◦ C
Antenna Cable -40 to 75◦ C -40 to 80◦ C
Humidity 10 to 90% 10 to 90%
non-condensing non-condensing

Table A.3: Temperature and Humidity List

Appendix B

Using Surge Arresters

B.1 Introduction
These instructions cover the installation of the Arbiter Systems Model AS0094500, Surge Arrester.
The AS0094500 performs two basic functions:

1. Provides a solid and reliable grounding point for the antenna system connected to a GPS
receiver;
2. Protects connected equipment from the damaging effects of atmospheric static electricity and
induced voltage spikes from nearby lightning strikes or other electrical events.

B.2 Description
The AS0094500 is a three-terminal device with two type F connectors and one ground terminal.
One of the F connectors connects to the GPS antenna and the other F connector to the GPS
receiver in the clock. A screw terminal provides a point to connect an earth ground wire. Being
weatherproof, the AS0094500 can be mounted outdoors provided that the cabling and Type F
connectors are sealed from the weather. The device will also pass the DC current necessary to
energize the GPS antenna.

B.3 Installation
B.3.1 Mounting Location
Location is a key consideration when installing the Model AS0094500. Mount as close as possible
to a good earth ground, such as a grounding rod or station ground grid. The shorter the path
between the arrester and the earth ground, the more effectively and reliably it will bypass the
induced voltages.

B.3.2 Ground Connection

The Model AS0094500 can be grounded in two ways: (1) via the ground-wire screw connection, or
(2) by hard-mounting directly to a grounded metal surface.
106 Using Surge Arresters

If grounding via the ground-wire screw connection, use the largest possible gauge wire, with
the shortest possible ground path. Hole diameter allows up to 8 AWG wire (0.129 in or 3.26 mm).
This wire should be as short as possible, and connected to a good earth ground.
Alternately, the AS0094500 could be mounted directly to a well-grounded plate within the
facility.

B.3.3 Antenna and Clock Connections

The AS0094500 is labeled to indicate which terminals should be connected to the GPS receiver and
to the GPS antenna. Use only a low-loss, tri-shield or quad-shield 75-ohm coaxial cable – RG-6
or RG-11 are the preferred cable types. RG-59, or other similar types of coaxial cable, should be
avoided due to greater signal loss and poorer shielding at the GPS frequency (1.575 GHz).

B.3.4 Weather Sealing the Connections

To protect from weather, use only type F connectors with appropriate sealing features. Typically
this includes an o-ring in the male connector that seats against the face of the female connector on
the surge arrester. Also, crimped connectors frequently include a silicone gel flooding compound,
which enhances the ability of the connection to withstand the rain and humid conditions. To better
seal the entire connection, cover the joint with GE Silicone II compound.
Use the proper crimping tool if using crimp-on connectors. Improper tools may not guarantee a
strong and sufficiently grounded connector resulting in poor cable performance and GPS reception.
Consider purchasing RF cables of various standard and custom lengths manufactured by Arbiter
Systems.

B.3.5 Suggested Mounting

Figure B.1 illustrates the recommended mounting of the AS0094500 with the F-connectors facing
downward. Install drip loops in the cables to reduce the likelihood of moisture penetrating the
device.

B.4 Physical Dimensions

Overall: 59mm x 38mm x 18mm (2.32in x 1.49in x 0.71in) LxWxH
Mounting Hole Dim: 50mm x 15mm
Mounting Hole Dia: 4mm (0.157in)
F Connector Dim: 24mm, center to center
Weight: 48.2 g (1.7 oz)
B.4 Physical Dimensions 107

Figure B.1: Suggested Mounting of the AS0094500 Surge Arrester

108 Using Surge Arresters
Appendix C

Options List

C.1 Introduction
Each Arbiter Model 1088B Satellite-Controlled Clock has a number of options that may be in-
stalled for special purposes. This section is devoted to these options, and provides supplemental
and detailed information for operation and configuration of these options. While many of these
options apply to other clock models than the Model 1088B, references to these models will be found
throughout this document.
Additionally, there will be references to certain capabilities and specifications that apply only to
specific clock models when using these options. For example, with Option 03, there will be a
large list of possible signals that can be selected with the option board jumpers. Some of these
signals may not apply to the other clock models than the Model 1088B because these signals do
not originate on the main clock board. The key to usage is to check the basic specification of the
clock to determine the option capability.
110 Options List

C.2 Option 01: Backlighted LCD Display

C.2.1 General Description
Option 01 for the Arbiter System line of Satellite-Controlled Clocks adds illumination to the front
panel display, if so equipped. The standard reflective liquid crystal display (LCD) is replaced with
a transflective LCD. An Electro-luminescent (EL) panel located behind the transflective LCD pro-
vides backlighting; thereby increasing the readability of the display in subdued lighting conditions.
The backlight can be set to remain on indefinitely, or to turn off after a predetermined time fol-
lowing the last keystroke. With the backlight turned off, the display is still readable in ordinary
ambient light.

C.2.2 Specifications
• Initial Luminance: 30 cd/m2 minimum
• Service Life: 4000 hours (down to 10 cd/m2)

C.2.3 Configuration
The SETUP menu outlined in the Operation Manual contains a sub-menu, which allows selection
of the backlight-operating mode. To set the backlight-operating mode, observe the following steps:

1. With the clock power turned on, press the SETUP key. The display should change to read,
SET RS-232.

2. Press the SETUP key repeatedly, until the display reads, “SET BACK LIGHT?”. Press the
ENTER key to select the backlight sub-menu. The current backlight operating mode will be
displayed, from one of the following selections:

• OFF – Backlight never on.

• ON – Backlight always on.
• AUTO – Backlight turns on when a key is pressed, remains on for 30 seconds after the
last key is pressed. This is the preferred mode for applications requiring a lighted display,
since it will provide the longest EL panel lifespan (see Specifications, above).

3. Pressing the UP and DOWN keys will change the selection. When the desired operating
mode is displayed, press the ENTER key to confirm the choice and return to the first level
of the SETUP menu.

The backlight operating mode can also be changed via the RS-232C port, using the L0, L1, or L2
commands for OFF, ON, and AUTO, respectively. For details regarding setting the backlight using
the RS-232C port, refer to Section 9.2.5.
C.3 Option 02: GPS Battery Backup - Obsolete 111

C.3 Option 02: GPS Battery Backup - Obsolete

NOTE: This option has become obsolete because the new GPS receivers incorporate a lithium
dioxide data backup battery. See the Model 1088B Operation Manual for further information.

C.3.1 General Description

Option 02 incorporates a nickel-cadmium battery to back up memory circuits, which store data
pertaining to GPS system parameters. Circuitry within the clock maintains the charge level of the
battery during normal operation, and the battery preserves the data during power outages or when
the clock is turned off.
The GPS backup battery supports the following functions and parameters: Function: Ephemeris
Data;
Description: Information pertaining to satellite position or projected position, as a function of time.
Storing the above information will reduce the time needed to re-acquire satellite lock when the unit
is turned on, or upon restoration of power after an outage.
NOTES:

1. There is no relationship between the GPS backup battery and the RAM backup battery
included in a standard Model 1088A/B clock. The purpose of the standard RAM backup
battery is to preserve the configuration settings for the instrument.

C.3.2 Specifications
Nickel-Cadmium, 3.6 volts, 60mAh, Memory Retention Time: 2 months (approximate)
112 Options List

C.4 Option 03: Four Additional Outputs - Obsolete

Option 03 has been replaced by Option 36, Four Configurable Outputs. See Section C.23

C.4.1 General Description

Option 03 adds four rear-panel outputs, which may be configured to any available signal in the
1088B series clocks. The configuration of the four outputs can be changed at any time via internal
jumper settings.

C.4.2 Specifications
General
Output Connectors: BNC-type RF connectors (4).

Analog Outputs

Output Type Operational amplifier (LF353) output, with 557-ohm series

resistor.
Available Outputs: Note: All outputs available
IRIG-B, Modulated: IRIG format B time code, modulated onto 1 kHz 10 Vpp sine
wave carrier.
Deviation (1088A/B): ±5 volts analog, corresponding to 1-PPS deviation channel
A or B (see individual clock Operation Manual). The pro-
portion is 1 V per 10-µs deviation (±50 µs full scale).

Digital Outputs

Output Type: High-Speed CMOS (74HC126), 0 to 5 volts, with 47 ohm

series resistance.
Available Output: Note: All outputs available on Model 1088B.
IRIG-B: IRIG format B time code (unmodulated).
C.4 Option 03: Four Additional Outputs - Obsolete 113

IRIG-E: IRIG format E time code.

IRIG-H: IRIG format H time code.
10 MPPS: 10,000,000 pulse-per-second (PPS) square wave, synchronous to the
1-PPS output.
5 MPPS: 5,000,000-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
1 MPPS: 1,000,000-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
100 kPPS: 100,000-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
10 kPPS: 10,000-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
1 kPPS: 1,000-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
100 PPS: 100-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
60 PPS: 60-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
50 PPS: 50-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
10 PPS: 10-PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1-PPS output.
IRIG-D/1 PPM: IRIG format D time code (1 pulse per minute), rising edge on time.
1 PPH: 1 pulse per hour, rising edge on time.
1 PPS: (10 ms “high”), synchronous to 1 PPS/GPS.
Programmable: Outputs a single pulse at a preprogrammed time, or a continuous
pulse train having a period of one day or less. Pulse width is ad-
justable from 0.01 to 600 seconds.
Out-of-Lock: Normally “HI” after acquisition of satellite signals. Toggles “LO”
nn minutes after loss of satellite signal lock. Range for “nn” is 00
to 99 minutes, and is set using the SETUP menu or RS-232C (refer
to clock Operation Manual). Setting of 00 disables this function
(output remains “HI”). This output follows the standard “Out-of-
Lock” function on the clock.
IRIG-B (Modified IRIG format “B” time code, Manchester encoded with 1-kPPS car-
Manchester): rier, and data transitions on time mark.

Changing Output Settings via Internal Settings

Case Removal
To change the configuration of Option 03, the top cover of the instrument must be removed. Turn
off the instrument, and disconnect the power cord. Using a T-25 torx driver, remove the four screws
holding the cover (and rack mount ears, if used) in place, and lift the cover off.
WARNING Do not remove the top cover while power is applied. Hazardous voltages are present
while the power cord is connected. Always disconnect the unit from the input power source before
removal of the top cover.
114 Options List

General Information
Option 03 incorporates an extremely flexible output selection system using jumpers on the Option
03 printed circuit board. Each of the four rear-panel BNC-type I/O connectors, included with
Option 03, can be configured to perform any of the available output functions. Figure 1 shows the
locations and functions for all of the jumpers on the Option 03 board.
Function Selection
Jumpers JMP3 through JMP10 determine which output function their respective I/O connectors
perform. The dotted lines in Figure 1 show the relationships between the jumper strips and the
connectors. Set the jumper for each connector to the appropriate location for the type of output
signal desired. Jumpers JMP4, 6, 8 and 10 refer to Output Function selections 1 and 2. Jumpers
JMP3, 5, 7, and 9 refer to Output Function selections 3 through 22. The signals available are listed
in the text to the left of the jumpers in Figure 1.
Mode Selection
In addition to specifying the output signal type for each individual connector, it is necessary to
define whether the signal is analog or digital. This is accomplished using jumpers JMP11, JMP12,
JMP14, and JMP15. Each of these jumpers corresponds to the output function jumper for one of
the output connectors; the relationships are illustrated by the dotted lines in Figure C.1. Table C.1
shows the Function and Mode jumper settings for all of the various output signal types. Only the
Modulated IRIG-B and Deviation outputs are analog; all others are digital.
Firmware Configuration
Press the SETUP key until reaching “SET OPTION CONTROL?” and press the ENTER key. The
display will indicate “SLOT A OPTION”. Press the UP or DOWN key to select ”3” and press
ENTER. Option 03 is now configured. Press any top-row key to leave the configure menu.

Figure C.1: Option 03 Jumper Configuration

C.4 Option 03: Four Additional Outputs - Obsolete 115

Output Signal Function Select Jumper Mode Select Jumper

IRIG-B Modulation 1 C
Deviation 2 C
IRIG-B 3 A
IRIG-E 4 A
IRIG-H 5 A
10 MPPS 6 A
5 MPPS 7 A
1 MPPS 8 A
100 kPPS 9 A
10 kPPS 10 A
1 kPPS 11 A
100 PPS 12 A
60 PPS 13 A
50 PPS 14 A
10 PPS 15 A
IRIG-D/1 PPM 16 A
1 PPM 17 A
1 PPS 18 A
Programmable Pulse 19 A
Out of Lock 20 A
IRIG-B Mod. Manch. 21 A
No Connection 22 A

Table C.1: Option 03, Output Connector Jumper Settings

116 Options List

C.5 Option 04: Parallel BCD Output

C.5.1 General Description
The Option 04 has 1 millisecond Resolution and expands the capabilities of the Model 1088B to
include:

• Either of the following:

– Time-of-year output in Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) format, with resolution down to

1 millisecond;
– Parallel Data output, with up to 48 bits that can be custom-configured at the factory
for specific applications;

• A continuous 1 pulse-per-second (1 PPS) output, with the rising edge of a 10 millisecond-wide

pulse synchronous to the rising edge of 1 PPS/GPS;

• A continuous 1,000 PPS (1 kPPS) square wave output, with rising edges synchronous to the
rising edge of 1 PPS/GPS;

• Four pins of the output connector that can be configured with combinations* of the following:

– Up to four digital signal outputs, the functions of which can be selected individually
from 18 choices.
– Up to two analog signal outputs, the functions of which can be selected individually
from two choices.

*Note: Since these auxiliary functions must share four connector pins, certain limitations will
apply when selecting combinations:

1. Enabling any one (or more) of the digital signal outputs precludes four bits from the parallel
data output, if used;

2. Each analog signal output used precludes one of the digital signal outputs; if two analog signal
outputs are employed, only two digital signal outputs are possible. Also, each analog signal
output displaces one bit from the parallel data interface, if used;
C.5 Option 04: Parallel BCD Output 117

C.5.2 Option 04 Firmware Setup

Figure C.2: Option 04 Firmware Setup

118 Options List

C.5.3 Specifications
General
Output Connector: 50 contact;Amphenol P/N 850-57L-40500-2700or equivalent.
Mating Connectors:
Plastic: Amphenol P/N 850-57F-30500-20
Metal Shell: Amphenol P/N 850-57FE-30500-20

Parallel BCD Output

Data Bus Width: 42 bits. For weighting, refer to Table 1.
Output Type: High-Speed CMOS, buffered, (74HCXXX), 0 to 5 volts.
Time Data Format: UTC or Local time data; corresponds to setting for IRIG
time data (see Chapter 5 in this manual).
Time Accuracy: Rising edge delay of 100 nS maximum (1 mS bit), relative to
1 PPS output rising edge.
Analog Outputs
Output Type: Operational amplifier (LF353) output, with 562 ohm series
resistor.
Pin Numbers: Output 1: pin 22
Output 2: pin 47
IRIG-B, Modulated: IRIG format B time code, modulated onto 1 kHz 10 Vpp sine
wave carrier.
Deviation: Model 1088B Only; ±5 volts analog, corresponding to 1 PPS
deviation channel A or B.
C.5 Option 04: Parallel BCD Output 119

C.5.4 Digital Outputs

Output Type: High-Speed CMOS (74HCXXX), 0 to 5 volts, with 47 ohm

series resistance.
Pin Numbers: Output 1: pin 22
Output 2: pin 47
Output 3: pin 23
Output 4: pin 48
Available Outputs:
IRIG-B: IRIG format B time code, 5 V CMOS (unmodulated).
IRIG-E: IRIG format E time code, 5 V CMOS.
IRIG-H: IRIG format H time code, 5 V CMOS.
IRIG-D/1 PPM: IRIG format D time code (1 pulse per minute), 5 V CMOS.
Rising edge on time.
10 MPPS: 10 MHz square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
5 MPPS: 5 MHz square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
1 MPPS: 1 MHz square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
100 kPPS: 100,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
10 kPPS: 10,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
1 kPPS: 1,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
100 PPS: 100 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
60 PPS:* 60 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
50 PPS:* 50 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
10 PPS: 10 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
1 PPS: 1 PPS (10 mS ”high”), synchronous to 1 PPS/GPS.
1 PPnnnS: 1 pulse per ”nnn” seconds (10 mS ”high”, synchronous to 1
PPS/GPS); ”nnn” corresponds to a number of seconds en-
tered by the user.
1 PPH: 1 pulse per hour, rising edge on time.
Out-of-Lock: 5 volt CMOS levels. Normally ”high” after acquisition of
satellite signals. Toggles ”low” nn minutes after loss of satel-
lite signal lock. Range for ”nn” is 00 to 99, and is set us-
ing the SETUP menu or RS-232C (refer to Chapter 6 and
Appendix C). Setting of 00 disables this function (output re-
mains ”high”).

* Available only with the Model 1088A/B series clocks.

120 Options List

C.5.5 Option 04 Connector Pin Designation

PinNo: BCD Mode Parallel Data Mode

Function/Bit Weighting: Function:
1 Ground Ground
2 1 PPS output Data Bit 47
*3 Output 4 (Dig. only) Data Bit 45
*4 Output 2 (Dig./An.) Data Bit 27
5 Day 200 Data Bit 35
6 Day 80 Data Bit 43
7 Day 20 Data Bit 41
8 Day 8 Data Bit 39
9 Day 2 Data Bit 37
10 20 Hr. Data Bit 33
11 8 Hr. Data Bit 31
12 2 Hr. Data Bit 29
13 40 Min. Data Bit 26
14 10 Min. Data Bit 24
15 4 Min. Data Bit 22
16 1 Min. Data Bit 20
17 20 Sec. Data Bit 17
18 8 Sec. Data Bit 15
19 2 Sec. Data Bit 13
20 800 mS Data Bit 11
21 200 mS Data Bit 9
22 80 mS Data Bit 7
23 20 mS Data Bit 5
24 8 mS Data Bit 3
25 2 mS Data Bit 1
26 Ground Ground
27 1 kPPS output Data Bit 46
*28 Output 3 (Dig. only) Data Bit 44
*29 Output 1 (Dig./An.) Data Bit 19
30 Day 100 Data Bit 34
31 Day 40 Data Bit 42
32 Day 10 Data Bit 40
33 Day 4 Data Bit 38
34 Day 1 Data Bit 36
35 10 Hr. Data Bit 32
36 4 Hr. Data Bit 30
37 1 Hr. Data Bit 28
38 20 Min. Data Bit 25
39 8 Min. Data Bit 23
40 2 Min. Data Bit 21

Table C.2: Option 04 Connector Pin Designation

Note: Table C.2 continued on next page.

C.5 Option 04: Parallel BCD Output 121

Table C.2 continued.

41 40 Sec. Data Bit 18

42 10 Sec. Data Bit 16
43 4 Sec. Data Bit 14
44 1 Sec. Data Bit 12
45 400 mS Data Bit 10
46 100 mS Data Bit 8
47 40 mS Data Bit 6
48 10 mS Data Bit 4
49 4 mS Data Bit 2
50 1 mS Data Bit 0

*These pins can be configured for any of the listed functions, regardless of the main mode of
operation for Option 04.

Figure C.3: Option 04 Output Connector

122 Options List

C.5.6 Configuration
General
Case Removal
To change the configuration of Option 04, the top cover of the instrument must be removed. Turn
off the instrument, and disconnect the power cord. Using a T-25 driver, remove the four screws
holding the cover (and rack mount ears, if used) in place, and lift the cover off.
WARNING: Do not remove the top cover while power is applied. Hazardous voltages are present
while the power cord is connected. Always disconnect the unit from the input power source before
removal of the top cover.

Jumper Functions and Locations

Upon removal of the top cover, locate the circuit board for Option 04 (a diagram of the board,
showing jumper locations, is given in Figure 2). The following sections outline the jumper setting
changes and other steps necessary to utilize the various features available with Option 04.

BCD Output Mode

General
When configured for BCD output of time data, Option 04 utilizes pins 1 through 21 and 26 through
46, along with ground pins 25 and 50. The weighting for the individual bits, along with the
connector pin locations, is given in Table 1. To configure Option 04 for BCD operation, observe
the following steps:

a. Set jumper JMP1 to position ”B”. This enables the BCD output mode.

b. Set jumper JMP6 to position ”A”. This jumper is included to set the timing mode when
utilizing the parallel data output, and must be set to position ”A” for the BCD output to
function properly.

Operation in the BCD output mode allows use of the analog and/or digital signal outputs, the 1
PPS and 1 kPPS outputs. Refer to the appropriate sections of this document for details of these
functions.
Time Data Format
The format of the BCD time data which is output from the rear-panel connector can be either
Local time or Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and will be the same as the time format which
is specified in the SETUP menu for the IRIG time data outputs. For further details, refer to the
flowchart titled ”Set IRIG Time DATA? in Chapter 6.
C.5 Option 04: Parallel BCD Output 123

Parallel Data Output Mode

Full operation in the parallel data output mode utilizes all 50 contacts of the output connector.
However, use of any combination of digital signal outputs or analog signal outputs will reduce the
number of data bits available by up to four (data bits 19, 27, 44, and 45). For details, refer to the
sections pertaining to these individual functions.
The functions of the individual data bits are defined for specific customer applications, upon request.
To configure Option 04 for parallel data mode, observe the following steps:

a. Set jumper JMP1 to position ”B”. This jumper enables the parallel data output mode.

b. Set jumpers JMP2, JMP3, JMP4, JMP5, and JMP11 to position ”A” (these settings will
vary if the analog and/or digital signal outputs are used; refer to the applicable sections for
more information on these functions).

c. If it is desired that the parallel output data be synchronous to the 1 PPS output, set jumper
JMP6 to position ”A”; for non-synchronous operation, set this jumper to position ”B”.

Digital Signal Outputs

The four digital signal outputs can be individually enabled and configured, using the following
steps:

a. Set jumper JMP11 to position ”A”. This enables the digital signal output mode. At the
same time, making this jumper selection eliminates parallel data bits 19, 27, 44, and 45.

b. To enable digital signal output number 1, set jumper JMP2 to position ”A”.

c. To set the type of output signal for digital signal output number 1, make the appropriate
selection on jumper JMP8 (refer to Figure 2). Note that positions 1 and 2 correspond to
analog signal outputs, and will be occupied by a jumper only if analog signal output number
1 is enabled.

d. To enable digital signal output number 2, set jumper JMP3 to position ”A”.

e. To set the type of output signal for digital signal output number 2, make the appropriate
selection on jumper JMP7 (refer to Figure 2). Note that positions 1 and 2 correspond to
analog signal outputs, and will be occupied by a jumper only if analog signal output number
2 is enabled.

f. To enable digital signal output number 3, set jumper JMP4 to position ”A”. This also
eliminates the possibility of using analog signal output number 1.

g. To set the type of output signal for digital signal output number 3, make the appropriate
selection on jumper JMP9 (refer to Figure 2).

h. To enable digital signal output number 4, set jumper JMP5 to position ”A”. This also
eliminates the possibility of using analog signal output number 2.

i. To set the type of output signal for digital signal output number 4, make the appropriate
selection on jumper JMP10 (refer to Figure 2).
124 Options List

Analog Signal Outputs

The two analog signal outputs can be individually enabled and configured, using the following
steps:

1. To enable analog signal output number 1, set jumper JMP4 to position ”B”. This setting
also eliminates the possibility of having parallel data bit 44, digital signal output number 3.

2. To select the type of signal for analog output 1, remove the jumper from jumper strip JMP9
(which is no longer active, since it corresponds to digital signal output number 3), and place
it on jumper strip JMP8 in either position 1 or 2 (refer to Figure 2).

3. To enable analog signal output number 2, set jumper JMP5 to position ”B”. This setting
also eliminates the possibility of having parallel data bit 45, digital signal output number 4.

4. To select the type of signal for analog output 2, remove the jumper from jumper strip JMP10
(which is no longer active, since it corresponds to digital signal output number 4), and place
it on jumper strip JMP7 in either position 1 or 2 (refer to Figure 2).

1 Pulse-per-Second (1 PPS) Output, 1,000 Pulse-per-Second (1 kPPS) Output

The 1 PPS and 1 kPPS outputs are enabled whenever Option 04 is placed in the BCD output mode
(jumper JMP1 set to position ”B”).
C.5 Option 04: Parallel BCD Output 125

Figure C.4: Option 04 Output Jumper Settings

126 Options List

Figure C.5: Option 04 Board Layout and Jumper Locations

C.6 Option 07: Inlet Power Supply Description 127

C.6 Option 07: Inlet Power Supply Description

C.6.1 85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz, 110 to 370 Vdc, Terminal Power Strip
Option 07 replaces the standard IEC-320 power inlet module with a three-position, screw-type
terminal block. Input voltages are 85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz or 110 to 370 Vdc, less than 20
Volt-Amps maximum. This feature is intended for use in installations where it is necessary or
desirable to have the instrument power hard-wired. See also pages 9 and 14 for additional detail.

Figure C.6: Option 07 Power Supply Inlet

Connector

C.6.2 Specifications
Fuse
Type: Bussman GBD-1A
Current Rating: 1 Ampere, fast-acting
Voltage Rating: 250 Volts
Size: 5mm x 20mm

Input Power
AC Voltage Range: 85 to 264 Vac
Frequency Range: 47 to 440 Hz
DC Voltage Range: 110 to 350 Vdc
Inlet Power: < 20 Watts
128 Options List

C.7 Option 08: Inlet Power Supply Description

C.7.1 10 to 60 Vdc ONLY, Terminal Power Strip, SWC
Option 08 replaces the standard IEC-320 power inlet module with a three-position, screw-type
terminal block. With DC ONLY inlet voltages from 10 to 60 Vdc, this feature is intended for use
in installations where it is necessary or desirable to have the instrument power hard-wired.

Figure C.7: Option 08 Power Supply Termi-

nal Strip Connector

C.7.2 Specifications
Input Power
DC Voltage: 10 to 60 Vdc.
Inlet Power: < 20 Watts, typical.

Terminal Strip
Terminal Assignment: Ground, (−), (+).
Left to right, viewed from rear.
Block Size: 49 mm W x 15mm H x 16.5 mm D.
(1.9” x 0.6” x 0.6”)
Block Material: Glass-filled thermoplastic.
Screw Size: 6–32 x 1/4”
Screw Material: Cadmium-plated steel.
Terminal Spacing: 9mm (0.35”).
Approvals: U.L. recognized; C.S.A. approved.

Fuse
Type: Bussman GDC-2A.
Current Rating: 2 Ampere, time lag.
Voltage Rating: 250 Volts.
Size: 5mm x 20mm.
C.8 Options 10: Battery Backup − Obsolete 129

C.8 Options 10: Battery Backup − Obsolete

C.9 Option 11: Four Additional Outputs and Battery Backup −

Obsolete
130 Options List

C.10 Option 12: OCXO and Four Additional Outputs

C.10.1 General Description
Option 12 for the Model 1088A/B adds a disciplined oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO)
having stability of 1 part in 107 over temperature, and four additional configurable outputs.

C.10.2 Specifications
General
Output Connectors: BNC-type RF connectors (4).
Oscillator: Oven-controlled, 1x10−7 , from 0 to 50◦ C.

C.10.3 Firmware Setup for Option 12

Hardware and firmware configuration of the Model 1088A/B is performed at the factory when this
option is ordered at the same time as the clock. The following instructions are intended primarily
for field installation or maintenance. In addition, if the instrument configuration is ever reset to
factory default settings, then this initialization will need to be performed so that the units firmware
will automatically recognize the Option 12 assembly.
To change the firmware setup for Option 12, use the SETUP menu of the Model 1088A/B. Press
the SETUP key repeatedly until SET OPTION BOARD appears in the display. Press ENTER,
and then press the UP key until OPTION 12 appears. Press ENTER again, and select the option
(if any) present in the B option slot of the unit. Press ENTER again. This completes the firmware
configuration for Option 12. More information about instrument firmware configuration with the
SETUP menus is found in section 5 of the Model 1088A/B Operation Manual.

C.10.4 Main Board Setup via Internal Jumpers

Hardware and firmware configuration of the Model 1088A/B is performed at the factory when
this option is ordered at the same time as the clock. The instructions, which follow are intended
primarily for field installation.

Case Removal:
To change the main board configuration for Option 12, the top cover of the instrument must be
removed. Turn off the instrument, and disconnect the power cord. Using a T-25 torx driver, remove
the four screws holding the cover (and rack mount ears, if used) in place, and lift the cover off.
WARNING Do not remove the top cover while power is applied. Hazardous voltages are present
while the power cord is connected. Always disconnect the unit from the input power source before
removal of the top cover.
Jumpers 2 and 3 of the main board assembly (see Figure 5.1) must be set properly to allow the
Option 12 oscillator to drive the clock. The setting for Jumper 2 should be changed to B (External
Reference) and the setting for Jumper 3 should be changed to B (5 MHz). When these settings
have been completed, reinstall the instrument cover and reapply power.
C.10 Option 12: OCXO and Four Additional Outputs 131

C.10.5 Digital Outputs

Output Type: High-Speed CMOS (74HC126), 0 to 5 volts, with 47 ohm series resistance.
Available Outputs: Note: All outputs available on Model 1088B.
IRIG-B: IRIG format B time code (unmodulated).
IRIG-E: IRIG format E time code.
IRIG-H: IRIG format H time code.
10 MPPS: 10,000,000 pulse-per-second (PPS) square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS
output.
5 MPPS: 5,000,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
1 MPPS: 1,000,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
100 kPPS: 100,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
10 kPPS: 10,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
1 kPPS: 1,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
100 PPS: 100 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
60 PPS: 60 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
50 PPS: 50 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
10 PPS: 10 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
IRIG-D/1 PPM: IRIG format D time code (1 pulse per minute), rising edge on time.
1 PPH: 1 pulse per hour, rising edge on time.
1 PPS: 1 PPS (10 ms high), synchronous to 1 PPS/GPS.
Programmable: Outputs a single pulse at a preprogrammed time, or a continuous pulse
train having a period of one day or less. Pulse width is adjustable from
0.01 to 600 seconds.
Out-of-Lock: Normally HI after acquisition of satellite signals. Toggles LO nn minutes
after loss of satellite signal lock. Range for nn is 00 to 99, and is set using
the SETUP menu or RS-232C (refer to clock Operation Manual). Setting
of 00 disables this function (output remains HI). This output follows the
standard Out-of-Lock function on the clock.
IRIG-B IRIG format B time code, Manchester encoded with 1 kPPS carrier, and
(Modified Manchester): data transitions on time mark.

Table C.3: Option 12, Digital Outputs

132 Options List

C.10.6 Changing Output Settings via Internal Jumpers

Case Removal
To change the configuration of Option 12, the top cover of the instrument must be removed. Turn
off the instrument, and disconnect the power cord. Using a T-25 Torx driver, remove the four
screws holding the cover (and rack mount ears, if used) in place, and lift the cover off.
WARNING Do not remove the top cover while power is applied. Hazardous voltages are present
while the power cord is connected. Always disconnect the unit from the input power source before
removal of the top cover.

C.10.7 General Information

Option 12 incorporates an extremely flexible output selection system, which is made possible by the
same jumper scheme used in the main clock. Each of the four rear-panel BNC-type I/O connectors
included with Option 12 can be configured to perform any of the available output functions. Figure
1 shows the locations and functions for all of the jumpers on the Option 12 board.

Function Selection:
Jumpers JMP3 through JMP10 determine what output function their respective I/O connectors
perform. The dotted lines in Figure C.8 show the relationships between the jumper strips and the
connectors. Set the jumper for each connector to the appropriate location for the type of output
signal desired. The signals available are listed in the text to the left of the jumpers in Figure C.8.

Mode Selection:
In addition to specifying the output signal type for each individual connector, it is necessary to
define whether the signal is analog or digital. This is accomplished using jumpers JMP11, JMP12,
JMP14, and JMP15. Each of these jumpers corresponds to the output function jumper for one of
the output connectors; the relationships are illustrated by the dotted lines in Figure C.8. Table C.3
shows the Function and Mode jumper settings for all of the various output signal types. Only the
Modulated IRIG-B and Deviation outputs are analog; all others are digital.

C.10.8 Main Board Hardware Setup via Internal Jumpers

Hardware and firmware configuration of the Model 1088A/B is performed at the factory when this
option is ordered at the same time as the clock. The following instructions are intended primarily
for field installation.

Case Removal
To change the main board configuration for Option 12, the top cover of the instrument must be
removed. Turn off the instrument, and disconnect the power cord. Using a T-25 torx driver, remove
the four screws holding the cover (and rack mount ears, if used) in place, and lift the cover off.
WARNING Do not remove the top cover while power is applied. Hazardous voltages are present
while the power cord is connected. Always disconnect the unit from the input power source before
removal of the top cover.
C.10 Option 12: OCXO and Four Additional Outputs 133

Jumpers 2 and 3 of the main board assembly (see Figure 5.1 in this Manual) must be set properly
to allow the Option 12 oscillator to drive the clock. The setting for Jumper 2 should be changed
to B (External Reference) and the setting for Jumper 3 should be changed to B (5 MHz). When
these settings have been completed, reinstall the instrument cover and reapply power.

Figure C.8: Option 12 Output Signal Jumper Locations

Note: See also Table 5.2 for a list of jumpers.

134 Options List

C.11 Option 15A and 15B: Inlet Power Supply Description

C.11.1 110–170/110–300 Vdc, 85 to 264 Vac, 47 to 440 Hz Terminal Power
Strip, SWC
Option 15A and 15B each replace the standard IEC-320 power input module with a three-position,
screw-type terminal block, including Surge Withstand Capability (SWC). Option 15A is designed
for use with 125-volt station batteries, and the 15B is designed for use with 250-volt station batteries.
This feature is intended for use in installations where it is necessary or desirable to have the
instrument power hard-wired. See Section 3.3.

C.11.2 Specifications
Input Power:
AC Voltage Range: 85 to 264 Vac.
Frequency Range: 47 to 440 Hz.
DC Voltage Range (A/B): 110 to 170/110 to 300 Vdc.
Inlet Power: < 20 Watts.

Terminal Block:
Terminal Assignment: Ground, (−), (+), left to right, viewed from rear.
Block Size: 15mm W x 18mm H x 30mm D. (5/8” x 0.75” x 1 3/16”).
Approvals: U. L. recognized; C.S.A. approved.

Fuse:
Type: Bussman GDC-1A.
Current Rating: 1 Ampere, fast-acting.
Voltage Rating: 250 Volts.
Size: 5mm x 20mm.

Surge Withstand Protection (SWC)

Provides input Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) in compliance with both ANSI C37.90 and IEC
801-4.
Connections
All input power line connections to the rear-panel terminal strip should be made using appropriate
power cables which have the insulation removed about 1/4” from the end. For AC operation, input
line may be connected between (+) and (−), without regard to polarity; however proper grounding
should always be employed. If a DC source is used, connect the positive lead to the positive (+)
terminal, connect the negative lead to the negative (−) terminal and a safety ground lead to the
“G” terminal when viewing the instrument from the rear (see Section 3.3).
C.12 Option 17: Parallel BCD Output and Second RS-232 Port 135

C.12 Option 17: Parallel BCD Output and Second RS-232 Port
C.12.1 General Description
Option 17 for the Model 1088A/B clocks expand the capabilities of the instrument to include:

• Either of the following:

a. Time-of-year output in Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) format, with resolution down to

1 millisecond; or
b. Parallel Data output, with up to 48 bits that can be custom-configured at the factory
for specific applications;

• A continuous 1 pulse-per-second (1 PPS) output, with the rising edge of a 10 millisecond-wide

pulse synchronous to the rising edge of 1 PPS/GPS;

• A continuous 1,000 PPS (1 kPPS) square wave output, with rising edges synchronous to the
rising edge of 1 PPS/GPS;

• Four pins of the output connector that can be configured with combinations* of the following:

a. Up to four digital signal outputs, the functions of which can be selected individually
from 18 choices.
b. Up to two analog signal outputs, the functions of which can be selected individually
from two choices.
c. An RS-232C serial communications port, which can use between two and four lines.

*Note: Since these auxiliary functions must share four connector pins, certain limitations will
apply when selecting combinations:

• Enabling any one (or more) of the digital signal outputs precludes four bits from the parallel
data output, if used;

• Each analog signal output used precludes one of the digital signal outputs; if two analog signal
outputs are employed, only two digital signal outputs are possible. Also, each analog signal
output displaces one bit from the parallel data interface, if used;

• A two- or four-wire RS-232C port configuration uses two or four of the data output lines, so
these lines become unavailable for digital and/or analog signal outputs, or for the assigned
data bits of the parallel output (if used).
136 Options List

C.12.2 Option 17 Firmware Setup Procedure

Figure C.9: Option 17 Firmware Setup

Note: For additional programming information on other options, please see Chapter 6 or other
options in Appendix C.
C.12 Option 17: Parallel BCD Output and Second RS-232 Port 137

C.12.3 Specifications
General
Output Connector: 50 contact;Amphenol P/N 850-57L-40500-2700or equivalent.
Mating Connectors:
Plastic: Amphenol P/N 850-57F-30500-20
Metal Shell: Amphenol P/N 850-57FE-30500-20

Parallel BCD Output

Data Bus Width: 42 bits. For weighting, refer to Table 1.
Output Type: High-Speed CMOS, buffered, (74HCXXX), 0 to 5 volts.
Time Data Format: UTC or Local time data; corresponds to setting for IRIG
time data (see Chapters 5 and 6).
Time Accuracy: Rising edge delay of 100 nS maximum (1 mS bit), relative to
1 PPS output rising edge.
Analog Outputs
Output Type: Operational amplifier (LF353) output, with 562 ohm series
resistor.
Pin Numbers: Output 1: pin 22
Output 2: pin 47
IRIG-B, Modulated: IRIG format B time code, modulated onto 1 kHz 10 Vpp sine
wave carrier.
Deviation: Model 1088B Only; ±5 volts analog, corresponding to 1 PPS
deviation channel A or B.
138 Options List

C.12.4 Digital Outputs

Output Type: High-Speed CMOS (74HCXXX), 0 to 5 volts, with 47 ohm

series resistance.
Pin Numbers: Output 1: pin 22
Output 2: pin 47
Output 3: pin 23
Output 4: pin 48
Available Outputs:
IRIG-B: IRIG format B time code, 5 V CMOS (unmodulated).
IRIG-E: IRIG format E time code, 5 V CMOS.
IRIG-H: IRIG format H time code, 5 V CMOS.
IRIG-D/1 PPM: IRIG format D time code (1 pulse per minute), 5 V CMOS.
Rising edge on time.
10 MPPS: 10 MHz square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
5 MPPS: 5 MHz square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
1 MPPS: 1 MHz square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
100 kPPS: 100,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
10 kPPS: 10,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
1 kPPS: 1,000 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
100 PPS: 100 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
60 PPS:* 60 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
50 PPS:* 50 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
10 PPS: 10 PPS square wave, synchronous to the 1 PPS output.
1 PPS: 1 PPS (10 mS ”high”), synchronous to 1 PPS/GPS.
1 PPnnnS: 1 pulse per ”nnn” seconds (10 mS ”high”, synchronous to 1
PPS/GPS); ”nnn” corresponds to a number of seconds en-
tered by the user.
1 PPH: 1 pulse per hour, rising edge on time.
Out-of-Lock: 5 volt CMOS levels. Normally ”high” after acquisition of
satellite signals. Toggles ”low” nn minutes after loss of satel-
lite signal lock. Range for ”nn” is 00 to 99, and is set us-
ing the SETUP menu or RS-232C (refer to Chapter 6 and
Appendix C). Setting of 00 disables this function (output re-
mains ”high”).

* Available only with the Model 1088A/B series clocks.

C.12 Option 17: Parallel BCD Output and Second RS-232 Port 139

RS-232C

Output Type: CMOS, -12 to +12 volts.

Input Type: Standard RS-232C levels.
Inputs Available:
Receive Data Connector pin 4. Receives data from external device. Re-
(“RXD”): quires that JMP3 be set to position “B”. Precludes use of
digital signal output 2 or parallel data bit 27.
Data Terminal Connector pin 3. Informs clock that remote device is ready
Ready (“DTR”): to receive data. Requires that JMP5 be set to position “C”.
Precludes the use of digital signal output 4, analog signal
output 2, or parallel data bit 45.
Outputs Available:
Transmit Data Connector pin 29. Sends data to external device. Requires
(“TXD”): that JMP2 be set to position “B”. Precludes the use of digital
signal output 1 or parallel data bit 19.
Data Set Ready Connector pin 28. Informs the remote device that clock is
(“DSR”): prepared to send data. Requires that JMP4 be set to position
“C”. Precludes the use of digital signal output 3, analog
signal output 1, or parallel data bit 44.
140 Options List

C.12.5 Option 17 Connector Pin Designation

PinNo: BCD Mode Parallel Data Mode RS-232C

Function/Bit Weighting: Function: Function
1 Ground Ground Ground
2 1 PPS output Data Bit 47 −
*3 Output 4 (Dig. only) Data Bit 45 DTR
*4 Output 2 (Dig./An.) Data Bit 27 RXD
5 Day 200 Data Bit 35 −
6 Day 80 Data Bit 43 −
7 Day 20 Data Bit 41 −
8 Day 8 Data Bit 39 −
9 Day 2 Data Bit 37 −
10 20 Hr. Data Bit 33 −
11 8 Hr. Data Bit 31 −
12 2 Hr. Data Bit 29 −
13 40 Min. Data Bit 26 −
14 10 Min. Data Bit 24 −
15 4 Min. Data Bit 22 −
16 1 Min. Data Bit 20 −
17 20 Sec. Data Bit 17 −
18 8 Sec. Data Bit 15 −
19 2 Sec. Data Bit 13 −
20 800 mS Data Bit 11 −
21 200 mS Data Bit 9 −
22 80 mS Data Bit 7 −
23 20 mS Data Bit 5 −
24 8 mS Data Bit 3 −
25 2 mS Data Bit 1 −
26 Ground Ground Ground
27 1 kPPS output Data Bit 46 −
*28 Output 3 (Dig. only) Data Bit 44 DSR
*29 Output 1 (Dig./An.) Data Bit 19 TXD
30 Day 100 Data Bit 34 −
31 Day 40 Data Bit 42 −
32 Day 10 Data Bit 40 −
33 Day 4 Data Bit 38 −
34 Day 1 Data Bit 36 −
35 10 Hr. Data Bit 32 −
36 4 Hr. Data Bit 30 −
37 1 Hr. Data Bit 28 −
38 20 Min. Data Bit 25 −
39 8 Min. Data Bit 23 −
40 2 Min. Data Bit 21 −
C.12 Option 17: Parallel BCD Output and Second RS-232 Port 141

41 40 Sec. Data Bit 18 −

42 10 Sec. Data Bit 16 −
43 4 Sec. Data Bit 14 −
44 1 Sec. Data Bit 12 −
45 400 mS Data Bit 10 −
46 100 mS Data Bit 8 −
47 40 mS Data Bit 6 −
48 10 mS Data Bit 4 −
49 4 mS Data Bit 2 −
50 1 mS Data Bit 0 −

Table C.4: Option 17 Connector Pin Designation

*These pins can be configured for any of the listed functions, regardless of the main mode of
operation for Option 17.

Figure C.10: Option 17 Output Connector

142 Options List

C.12.6 Configuration
General
Case Removal
To change the configuration of Option 17, the top cover of the instrument must be removed. Turn
off the instrument, and disconnect the power cord. Using a T-25 driver, remove the four screws
holding the cover (and rack mount ears, if used) in place, and lift the cover off.
WARNING: Do not remove the top cover while power is applied. Hazardous voltages are present
while the power cord is connected. Always disconnect the unit from the input power source before
removal of the top cover.

Jumper Functions and Locations

Upon removal of the top cover, locate the circuit board for Option 17 (a diagram of the board,
showing jumper locations, is given in Figure 2). The following sections outline the jumper setting
changes and other steps necessary to utilize the various features available with Option 17.

BCD Output Mode

General
When configured for BCD output of time data, Option 17 utilizes pins 1 through 21 and 26 through
46, along with ground pins 25 and 50. The weighting for the individual bits, along with the
connector pin locations, is given in Table 1. To configure Option 17 for BCD operation, observe
the following steps:

a. Set jumper JMP1 to position ”B”. This enables the BCD output mode.

b. Set jumper JMP6 to position ”A”. This jumper is included to set the timing mode when
utilizing the parallel data output, and must be set to position ”A” for the BCD output to
function properly.

Operation in the BCD output mode allows use of the analog and/or digital signal outputs, the 1
PPS and 1 kPPS outputs, and the RS-232C communications port. Refer to the appropriate sections
of this document for details of these functions.
Time Data Format
The format of the BCD time data which is output from the rear-panel connector can be either
Local time or Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and will be the same as the time format which
is specified in the SETUP menu for the IRIG time data outputs. For further details, refer to the
flowchart titled ”Set IRIG Time DATA? in the 1088B Operation manual.
C.12 Option 17: Parallel BCD Output and Second RS-232 Port 143

Parallel Data Output Mode

Full operation in the parallel data output mode utilizes all 50 contacts of the output connector.
However, use of any combination of digital signal outputs or analog signal outputs, or RS-232C will
reduce the number of data bits available by up to four (data bits 19, 27, 44, and 45). For details,
refer to the sections pertaining to these individual functions.
The functions of the individual data bits are defined for specific customer applications, upon request.
To configure Option 17 for parallel data mode, observe the following steps:
a. Set jumper JMP1 to position ”B”. This jumper enables the parallel data output mode.
b. Set jumpers JMP2, JMP3, JMP4, JMP5, and JMP11 to position ”A” (these settings will vary
if the analog and/or digital signal outputs or RS-232C port are used; refer to the applicable
sections for more information on these functions).
c. If it is desired that the parallel output data be synchronous to the 1 PPS output, set jumper
JMP6 to position ”A”; for non-synchronous operation, set this jumper to position ”B”.

Digital Signal Outputs

The four digital signal outputs can be individually enabled and configured, using the following
steps:
a. Set jumper JMP11 to position ”A”. This enables the digital signal output mode. At the
same time, making this jumper selection eliminates parallel data bits 19, 27, 44, and 45.
b. To enable digital signal output number 1, set jumper JMP2 to position ”A”. This also
eliminates the TXD RS-232C line.
c. To set the type of output signal for digital signal output number 1, make the appropriate
selection on jumper JMP8 (refer to Figure 2). Note that positions 1 and 2 correspond to
analog signal outputs, and will be occupied by a jumper only if analog signal output number
1 is enabled.
d. To enable digital signal output number 2, set jumper JMP3 to position ”A”.
e. To set the type of output signal for digital signal output number 2, make the appropriate
selection on jumper JMP7 (refer to Figure 2). Note that positions 1 and 2 correspond to
analog signal outputs, and will be occupied by a jumper only if analog signal output number
2 is enabled.
f. To enable digital signal output number 3, set jumper JMP4 to position ”A”. This also
eliminates the possibility of using analog signal output number 1.
g. To set the type of output signal for digital signal output number 3, make the appropriate
selection on jumper JMP9 (refer to Figure 2).
h. To enable digital signal output number 4, set jumper JMP5 to position ”A”. This also
eliminates the possibility of using analog signal output number 2.
i. To set the type of output signal for digital signal output number 4, make the appropriate
selection on jumper JMP10 (refer to Figure 2).
144 Options List

Analog Signal Outputs

The two analog signal outputs can be individually enabled and configured, using the following
steps:
To enable analog signal output number 1, set jumper JMP4 to position ”B”. This setting also
eliminates the possibility of having parallel data bit 44, digital signal output number 3.
To select the type of signal for analog output 1, remove the jumper from jumper strip JMP9 (which
is no longer active, since it corresponds to digital signal output number 3), and place it on jumper
strip JMP8 in either position 1 or 2 (refer to Figure 2).
To enable analog signal output number 2, set jumper JMP5 to position ”B”. This setting also
eliminates the possibility of having parallel data bit 45, digital signal output number 4.
To select the type of signal for analog output 2, remove the jumper from jumper strip JMP10
(which is no longer active, since it corresponds to digital signal output number 4), and place it on
jumper strip JMP7 in either position 1 or 2 (refer to Figure 2).

1 Pulse-per-Second (1 PPS) Output, 1,000 Pulse-per-Second (1 kPPS) Output

The 1 PPS and 1 kPPS outputs are enabled whenever Option 17 is placed in the BCD output mode
(jumper JMP1 set to position ”B”).
C.12 Option 17: Parallel BCD Output and Second RS-232 Port 145

Figure C.11: Option 17 Output Jumper Settings

146 Options List

Figure C.12: Option 17 Board Layout and Jumper Locations

C.13 Option 17A Second RS-232 Interface 147

C.13 Option 17A Second RS-232 Interface

C.13.1 General Description
Option 17A for the Model 1088B adds a second RS-232C port, allowing communications and control
via a 9-pin connector on the rear panel. This document provides specifications and instructions for
installing this option in the Model 1088B Satellite-Controlled Clock.

C.13.2 Specifications
C.13.3 Commands
All commands which are available for the main RS-232C port on the Model 1088B may be used
with Option 17A. A list of commands is located in the back of the operation manual.

C.13.4 RS-232 Pinout

Pin 1 No Connection
Pin 2 Receive Data input (RXD)
Pin 3 Transmit Data output (TXD)
Pin 4 RS-232 Aux. Output*
Pin 5 Signal Common
Pin 6 RS-232 Aux. Input*
Pin 7 RS-232 Aux. Output*
Pin 8 RS-232 Aux. Input*
Pin 9 No Connection

Table C.5: Option 17, RS-232 Port Pins

* These pins may be programmed at customer request, for example, for modem or printer control.
In the standard unit, they have no function.

C.13.5 Option 17A Field Installation Kit Parts List

Assembly Number; AS0070600
1. CA0015402 Clock Option Interface Cable, 1 each
2. HD0043700, 1088 Option 17A Mounting Bracket, 1 each
3. Screw, M3 x 0.5 x 8mm Lg., T-10 panhead, machine, 2 each
4. LA0005002, Rear Panel Label, Option RS-232, 1 each
5. LB0015601, 1088 OPT. 17A Board; Second RS-232 Port, 1 each
6. PD0017900A, Installation Instructions, Option 17A, 1 each
148 Options List

C.13.6 Option 17A Firmware Setup

Option 17A is physically located in Option Slot B. Check Section 6.12, on page 55, and the flowchart
below for setup information.

Figure C.13: Option 17 RS-232 Port Setup

C.13 Option 17A Second RS-232 Interface 149

C.13.7 Installation
Physical Installation
Option 17A may be installed in a Model 1088B Satellite-Controlled Clock by performing the fol-
lowing steps:

1. Disconnect the power source from the instrument.

2. Using a T-25 torx driver (or large slot screwdriver), remove the four screws holding the
instrument top cover in place. Remove the cover.

3. Locate the rear-panel opening for optional I/O connectors. When viewing the instrument
from the front, the opening is located at the right-rear, and is covered by a plate.

4. Using a T-10 torx driver, remove the two screws holding the cover plate, and remove the
cover plate. Save the screws.

5. Insert the Option 17A Bracket (HD0043700) included with Option 17A kit in place of the old
cover plate, but do not install the screws.

6. Carefully punch two holes in the Mylar tape on the bottom of the option board to allow
screws to pass through the Option 17A board and the mounting bracket.

7. Position the Option 17A circuit board over the four mounting studs, with the 9-pin connector
protruding through the rear-panel opening.

8. Secure the option board and the cover plate in place, using the two screws removed in step 4
and the two screws included with Option 17A.

9. Install the interconnect cable between J9 on the Model 1088B main circuit board and J1
on the Option 17A circuit board. The connectors on the cable are keyed so as to prevent
backwards installation.

10. Install the middle connector if a second option board is already installed in option slot A
(located between Option 17A and the main board).

11. Replace the instrument top cover and screws, restore input power, and turn the instrument
ON.

Firmware Configuration
The internal operating firmware for the Model 1088B must be configured to recognize that the
Option 17A has been installed. This is accomplished by performing the following steps:

1. Enter the Setup Menu by pressing the SETUP key.

2. Press the UP key repeatedly, until the display reads SET OPTION BOARD. Press the EN-
TER key.

3. The display will indicate whether an option is installed in Option Slot A. Press the ENTER
key to confirm this status without changing it.
150 Options List

4. The display will now indicate the status of Option Slot B. Press the UP or DOWN keys until
the display reads:
OPTION SLOT B
OPTION 17A

5. Pressing the ENTER key confirms the selection of Option 17A and enables a series of sub-
menus for configuration of communications parameters. When all of the parameters have
been set, the display returns to the top level of the Setup Menu. Pressing any of the top row
function keys returns the instrument to normal operation.
C.14 Option 18: IRIG-B BUS Distribution, Fault Monitor and 2nd RS-232 Port 151

C.14 Option 18: IRIG-B BUS Distribution, Fault Monitor and

2nd RS-232 Port
C.14.1 General Description
Option 18 for the Model 1088B adds several capabilities to the clock, which are often used in
systems applications. These capabilities include:
• An IRIG-B distribution bus amplifier that drives dozens of loads over distances of hundreds
of meters
• A fault monitor that expands the ability of the Model 1088B to detect internal faults and
provides two form-C (SPDT) fail-safe relay contact sets to indicate the Unlocked and Fault
conditions. These relay contacts are for connection to external equipment such as a digital
fault recorder.
• A second serial (RS-232) port, which can be used as a status event logger, for a broadcast
time output, to connect to a second computer; or as a redundant clock interface allowing two
Model 1088B clocks to be interconnected to form a redundant timing system.

C.14.2 Specifications

IRIG-B Distribution Bus

Output Connector: Pluggable terminal strip, 5mm centers.
Loads 24, minimum, with Model 10882A load taps.
Bus Length Limited by bus configuration; will drive 500m (1500’) of
AWG18 twisted-pair cable in a linear configuration.
Delay Less than 100 microseconds, typical; depends on loading and
bus configuration.
Output Level, Tap Output 6.4-11 Vpp, open-circuit; 3.2-5.5 Vpp, into 600 ohm load.

Fault Monitor
Indication: Via rear-panel relay, front-panel display, or serial port.
Faults Detected:
IRIG-B Distribution: Three fault modes will generate an alarm: any break in the
distribution bus; or a short circuit, or load impedance below
50 ohms; or any loss of the IRIG-B drive signal.
Processor: Watchdog violation or other reset condition.
Power Supply: 5 volt, +12 volt and -12 volt supplies out of limits.
152 Options List

Redundant Clock Control

Interface
Interconnect: Using Arbiter Systems P/N CA0017200 cable assembly.
Communications: Uses RS-232 port and two dedicated hardware lines.

Relays Two, form-C (SPDT), fail-safe (in faulted position with

power off).
Contact Rating: 130 Vdc at 0.3 A; 24 Vdc at 1 A.
Function: Unlocked (energized when locked to satellites);Fault (ener-
gized when no fault conditions present).

Associated Products

Model 10882A IRIG-B Distribution Tap

Model 10883A IRIG-B Distribution Bus Splitter
Model 10884A IRIG-B Distribution Bus Terminator
Model 10885A IRIG-B Distribution Redundant Ring Adapter

C.14.3 Discussion – IRIG-B Distribution System

Option 18 for the Model 1088B GPS Satellite-Controlled Clock provides an IRIG-B distribution
bus output which is capable of driving 24 separate taps, loaded at 600 ohms, over a length of 500
meters of cable. Longer cable lengths, or more taps, may be possible, depending on the loading
and signal levels required.
Option 18 includes a built-in distribution system monitor, which continually checks for two condi-
tions: the presence of an IRIG signal at the bus output terminals, and dc electrical continuity in the
distribution bus cable. Any fault in the clock mainframe or Option 18 board which results in loss
of IRIG drive, any bus short within approximately one kilometer of the clock (or more, depending
on bus configuration and loading), and any electrical open circuit (a cut cable, for instance) will
be detected and reported as a FAULT via the front-panel FAULT LED, the FAULT relay output,
and RS-232.
Even in the presence of a break in the cable, service may be maintained at all taps, and the break
detected and reported for maintenance, using the Model 10885A IRIG-B Distribution Redundant-
Ring Adapter with a ring or loop-configured distribution bus (where the ’far end’ of the bus is
physically brought back to the start). This allows the system to offer a substantial degree of
survivability with respect to broken cables, while nonetheless reporting the problem for corrective
action. The Model 10885A also provides 3750 Vrms isolation from the return end of the bus to the
clock mainframe, to prevent voltages induced in the bus loop from causing currents to flow in the
distribution bus or its shield.
C.14 Option 18: IRIG-B BUS Distribution, Fault Monitor and 2nd RS-232 Port 153

The Model 10882A tap is used to provide a decoupled, isolated output signal to your system loads.
The source impedance of this tap is approximately 600 ohms, and it will provide an open-circuit
signal level of 6.4 to 11 Vpp, depending on overall system loading and distance from the clock
mainframe. Each tap provides 3750 Vrms isolation from the distribution bus to the load, as well as
surge suppression and EMI filtering. The taps are capacitively-isolated from the dc bus monitoring
current.
One Model 10884A terminator is located at the end of a linear distribution bus, and one at the end
of each branch. This inductive terminator provides a high impedance to the IRIG-B signal while
providing a return path for the dc loop current used for continuity monitoring.
The Model 10883A splitter is used to drive a branch from the main distribution bus, or to split a
bus into two branches. It drives the two output branches in parallel as far as the IRIG-B signal is
concerned, while they are connected in series for the dc loop monitoring current.

Bus Configurations
Using these three components, a linear or branched network can be assembled in any required
configuration, while maintaining the ability of the Option 18 bus monitor to detect an open-circuit
fault at any point along the bus or any branch. If the Model 10885A redundant-ring adapter is
used to build a basic ring network, the Model 10884A terminator and Model 10883A splitter are
not required. However, as shown in the accompanying figures, a complex system can be built using
rings, branches, and linear segments in various combinations as needed to satisfy your requirements.

Determining Actual Signal Output Levels

The actual signal levels at the outputs of the various taps may be approximated with acceptable
accuracy by treating the network as a resistive array. The source impedance of the Option 18
bus output is approximately 21 ohms. The recommended cable (Belden 8760 or equivalent, #18
AWG shielded twisted pair) has a resistance of 43 ohms per kilometer (13 ohms per thousand feet).
The Model 10885A redundant-ring adapter has an effective series resistance to the ac signal of
approximately 10 ohms. The Model 10883A splitter has an effective series resistance of less than
one ohm.
Each Model 10882A tap places a load across the bus of approximately 580 ohms plus the load
impedance it is driving; i.e. the tap acts like a 580-ohm resistor in series with the load, with which
it forms a voltage divider. The Model 10884A terminator may be treated as an open circuit so far
as the IRIG signal is concerned.
By using these numbers, along with the load impedances, in a suitable circuit-analysis program,
or by solving the loop equations manually, the attenuation from the Option 18 bus output to the
load at each tap may be determined. The open-circuit output level at the Option 18 bus output is
nominally 11 volts peak-to-peak with a tolerance of +5%; knowing this, along with the attenuation
values, you can calculate the signal level at each tap.

Total DC Resistance Limit - Bus Monitor

There is a 500-ohm limit on the total dc resistance of the distribution system to ensure proper
operation of the bus continuity monitor. This limit will not normally be a factor in system design.
Still, loop dc resistance should be calculated for each system.
154 Options List

Since all of the components which pass dc current are effectively in series as far as the dc current
is concerned, the resistances can simply be summed up. If the total is less than 500 ohms, proper
operation is ensured.
The cable resistance is 43 ohms/km (13 ohms/Mft.) for the dc monitor current. The dc resistance
of the Model 10885A redundant-ring adapter is 4 ohms. The dc resistance of each Model 10884A
terminator and each Model 10883A splitter is 30 ohms. The number of taps has no effect on the
system dc resistance.
The magnitude of the dc monitor current is 10 mA +10% with a maximum dc open-circuit voltage
of 8.5 volts. In the USA, NEC class-2 wiring is acceptable.

Detection of Short Circuits; Drive Capability

The Option 18 bus output is intended to drive a total ac load of 50 ohms or greater, although it
will continue to operate without excessive signal distortion into any impedance. The bus monitor
includes a circuit which detects the presence of the IRIG-B signal at the system output. The bus
monitor is sensitive to both the waveshape of the signal at the bus output (it must look like a
modulated IRIG-B signal), and the level of that signal.
If the load impedance drops below approximately 40 ohms, a drop in signal level will occur due
to the 21-ohm source resistance of the bus driver. At this point, the output level will drop below
the threshold required by the bus monitor, in turn causing a bus FAULT to be reported. Since
in normal operation the system load exceeds 50 ohms, such a fault must be the result of a short
circuit at some point along the bus.
Thus, the bus monitor function of the Option 18 IRIG-B distribution output is capable of detecting
the three most likely types of system fault: failure of the IRIG-B drive signal at the source, an
open circuit along the distribution bus, or a short of the distribution bus.

Installation

Installation of the IRIG-B distribution bus is straightforward for those experienced with the instal-
lation of control and communication wiring. No special tools are required. All of the components
are terminated with pluggable, screw-type terminal blocks. A 3 mm (1/8”) flat-bladed screwdriver,
wire cutters and strippers are all that is required to terminate the cable.
The figures which follow show typical network topologies. The various components may be con-
nected together in any configuration desired, provided that the basic rules described above are not
broken. Multiple branches or loops may be used, and the number of taps is limited only by the
loading and signal level requirements described above. The limit of 24 taps only applies if they all
are loaded with 600 ohms; for higher or lower load impedances, a greater or fewer number of taps
will be possible.
When connecting the network, observe polarity of all components. Both the IRIG-B signal and
the dc loop monitor current have polarity which must be observed for proper operation. All of the
components needed to assemble your system are marked for polarity.
The output of the taps is isolated and floating, and either end may be grounded. However, if the
signal polarity is incorrect, the device being driven by the tap may not operate properly.
C.14 Option 18: IRIG-B BUS Distribution, Fault Monitor and 2nd RS-232 Port 155

C.14.4 Option 18 Firmware Setup

Figure C.14: Option 18 Firmware Setup

156 Options List

C.14.5 Typical Network Configuration

Figure C.15: Option 18 Network Configuration

C.14 Option 18: IRIG-B BUS Distribution, Fault Monitor and 2nd RS-232 Port 157

C.14.6 Option 18 Component Wiring Diagrams

Figure C.16: Option 18 Wiring Diagrams

C.14.7 Discussion - Redundant Timing Operation

In redundant-clock mode, two Model 1088B clocks, each with Option 18, are interconnected with
the Arbiter Systems part number CA0017200 cable assembly. This cable installs between the two
9-pin D-subminiature connectors on the Option 18 assemblies of the two units. Either end of the
cable may go to either clock; neither unit has higher or lower priority than the other.
158 Options List

Output Signal Enable and Configuration

When jumper JMP17 on the main clock board is set properly, the digital outputs of that clock
are controlled by the redundant-control interface. The status of the drivers is indicated by the
’On Line’ LED annunciator on the clock front panel. Refer to paragraphs 3.2 through 3.3.4 of the
1088B Operation manual if it should be necessary to modify the jumper settings; they are normally
preset at the factory prior to shipment.
To make the best use of the redundant clock feature, both clocks should have their main four outputs
set for the same set of signals. Then, the outputs may be directly tied in parallel, and the ’On Line’
clock will drive the connected loads. Note that the output enable only affects the digital outputs
(everything except IRIG-B modulated and chart recorder output). If you connect two analog
outputs together, no damage will be done, but both signals will be present simultaneously. The
IRIG bus distribution output of the Option 18 assembly should be used for a redundant modulated
IRIG-B output; it includes an on-line enable relay, which is also controlled by the output enable
function.

On-Line Control and Arbitration

In normal operation, when no fault is detected, the ’On Line’ clock is determined by the ’luck of
the draw.’ The only exception to this is if one of the clocks includes a higher-stability internal
timebase, such as Option 12. In this case, the clock with the higher-quality timebase will be the
nominal on-line clock.
Once each second, the clocks exchange status information via the RS-232 interface. In the event that
one of the clocks determines that it is not as healthy as the other, it will automatically relinquish
on-line status to the other unit. For the most part, this is performed in firmware; however, there
is also a hardware input to the redundant-control circuit, which is driven by the microprocessor
watchdog/reset generator. If this circuit detects any error, a direct hardware transfer to the other
unit is performed. Thus, in the event of a processor failure which might prevent the clock from
relinquishing on-line status via firmware, the transfer will be accomplished automatically through
this hardware feature.
Determination of the on-line clock in the event of multiple failures is made by comparison of the
status bytes (refer to paragraph 4.4 for a discussion of clock status). The clock with the lower-
valued status byte will be elected to on-line status. The status of both clocks may be monitored
from either of the clocks via the SS RS-232 command; see Appendix A of the 1088B Operation
manual for a description.

Use With Other Options

Certain other options, including Options 03 and 20, can be installed in the clock mainframe along
with the Option 18 board, and also can provide redundant control of their outputs via the redundant
clock control function of the Option 18 assembly. See the documentation for these options to
determine if any jumper settings are required to take advantage of this feature.

C.14.8 Option 18 Setup

The setup menu to control the operation of the Option 18 interface is shown earlier in this section
(Option 18 Firmware Setup). No internal configuration is necessary for proper operation of the
C.14 Option 18: IRIG-B BUS Distribution, Fault Monitor and 2nd RS-232 Port 159

Option 18, except to convert between redundant and normal operation as regards the output-enable
control for the clock digital output drivers. If you need to change this setting, refer to paragraph
3.3 of the 1088B Operation Manual for instructions. These jumpers are normally configured at the
factory to match each customer’s order.

RS-232 Pinout
The pinout of the RS-232 connector is as follows:

Pin 1 Redundant Control Interface

Disable Input2
Pin 2 TXD, Transmit Data output
Pin 3 RXD, Receive Data input
Pin 4 RS-232 Aux. Output1
Pin 5 Signal Common
Pin 6 RS-232 Aux. Input2
Pin 7 RS-232 Aux. Output2
Pin 8 RS-232 Aux. Input2
Pin 9 Redundant Control Interface
Disable Output2

1. These pins may be programmed at customer request, for example, for modem or printer control.
In the standard unit, they have no function.
2. These pins have 5-volt CMOS levels, unlike the others, which have RS-232 levels. If you are not
using the redundant clock interface, do not connect these pins.
160 Options List

Terminal Strip Pinout

Pin 1 is the leftmost pin, viewing the panel from the rear. Pin 9 is the rightmost. Three mating
connectors (three pins each), Arbiter Systems part number CN0019203A, are included with the
unit.

Pin 1 Fault Relay Normally-Closed Contact1

Pin 2 Fault Relay Normally-Open Contact2
Pin 3 Fault Relay Common Contact
Pin 4 Unlocked Relay Normally-Closed Contact1
Pin 5 Unlocked Relay Normally-Open Contact2
Pin 6 Unlocked Relay Common Comtact
Pin 7 IRIG Bus Positive Polarity Output
Pin 8 IRIG Bus Common (Chassis Ground)
Pin 9 IRIG Bus Negative Polarity Output

1. The normally-closed contact is connected to Common when power is off, and when the relay is
in the ’fault’ or ’unlocked’ state.
2. The normally open contact is connected to Common during normal operation, with no fault
conditions present.
C.15 Option 19: Model 1088B Fault Relay 161

C.15 Option 19: Model 1088B Fault Relay

C.15.1 General Description
Option 19 for the Model 1088B Satellite-Controlled Clock incorporates a fail-safe single-pole,
double-throw (SPDT) relay into the Out-of-Lock function already available in the standard in-
strument. Relay activation is subject to the same user-configurable delay as the standard output;
thus it will occur at the same moment as the logic-level Out-of-Lock signal from the rear panel (if
so configured). Normally-open, normally-closed, and common connections are available at screw
terminals on the rear panel. “Normally” means the clock is operating without fault.

Figure C.17: Option 19 External Wired Fault Relay

C.15.2 Specifications
C.15.3 Relay Contacts

Type: Dry; gold-clad silver.

Contact Resistance: 60 milliohms
UL/CSA Ratings: 1 A @ 30 Vdc;
0.5 A @ 125 Vac
0.3 A @ 110 Vdc

C.15.4 Terminal Strip

Terminal Assignment: N.C./N.O./COM.

left to right, viewed from rear.
Block Size: 49-mm W x 15-mm H x 16.5-
mm D
(1.9: x 0.6 x 0.6)
Block Material: Glass-filled thermoplastic.
Screw Size: 6-32 x 1/4”
Screw Material: Cadmium-plated steel.
162 Options List

C.15.5 Option 19 Firmware Setup

There is no setup in firmware for this option.

C.15.6 Connections
All connections to the rear-panel terminal strip should be made using spade lugs or ring lugs
suitable for use with #6 screws. Refer to Figure C.17 and the specifications given above for
terminal assignments. The designations normally-open and normally-closed refer to the position of
the relay contacts during normal operation, prior to encountering an out-of-lock condition. This is
a fail-safe relay; it is in the faulted state with power OFF.

Figure C.18: Option 19 Relay Connections

Note that in the above diagrams, n.c. and n.o. correspond to the rear-panel terminal markings, and
refer to the condition when the relay is energized (normal clock operation).

C.15.7 Configuration
After the connections have been made, configuration of the fault relay is accomplished in the same
manner as configuration of the Out-of-Lock function (the relay is driven internally by the Out-of-
Lock circuitry). The Out-of-Lock function is enabled and configured using the SETUP menu for
the 1088B, which is described in Section 5 of the 1088B Operation Manual.
The SETUP menu allows entry of a value between 00 and 99 for Out-of-Lock Delay Time. The
delay time value represents the amount of time, in minutes, that satellite synchronization must be
continuously lost before the instrument outputs an Out-of-Lock signal and simultaneously activates
the Out-of-Lock relay. If the value is set to 00, the Out-of-Lock function is disabled, and the Out-
of-Lock output and the relay are both in the locked state whenever power is on.
The procedure for setting the Out-of-Lock function is as follows:

1. With the clock power turned on, press the SETUP key. The display should change to read,
SET RS-232?.

2. Press the SETUP key repeatedly, until the display reads, SET OUT-OF-LOCK?. Press the
ENTER key to select the Out-of-Lock sub-menu. The current out-of-lock delay time (between
00 and 99) will be displayed.

3. Pressing the UP and DOWN keys will change the selection. When the desired out-of-lock
delay time is displayed, press the ENTER key to confirm the choice and return to the first
level of the SETUP menu. To return the 1088B to normal operation, press one of the function
keys in the top row of the front panel keyboard.
C.15 Option 19: Model 1088B Fault Relay 163

Special Note
In some applications, the fault relay may be required to switch into a capacitive load. An example
would be an input to a substation DFR or SER, in which a capacitor is placed across the input
terminals for surge or noise suppression (see schematic below).

Figure C.19: Option 19 Relay Circuit without Resistor

Note that if the relay contacts are closed, a substantial momentary current will flow into the 0.1 uf
capacitor. This could damage or degrade the contacts of the relay. This problem may be alleviated
by adding a 100 ohm, 0.5 watt resistor in series with the relay, thereby limiting the charging current
to the capacitor (see below).

Figure C.20: Option 19 Relay Circuit with Resistor

This resistor is not normally installed at the factory, due to the range of different applications in
which Option 19 may be used, and the fact that in many applications, no resistor is needed or
desired.
The modification can be implemented by adding a resistor to the Option 19 circuit board inside of
the Model 1088B. The following steps describe the procedure necessary for installing the resistor.
164 Options List

1. Disconnect the input power to the Model 1088B.

2. Using a T-25 torx driver (or a flat-blade screwdriver), remove the four screws securing the
top cover of the instrument, and remove the cover.

3. Locate the Option 19 terminal strip assembly. Using a T-10 torx driver, remove the two
screws holding the assembly to the main chassis.

4. Remove the three-wire connector from the header on the Option 19 circuit board. (Note:
It will be necessary to perform step 3 prior to removing the connector, in order to allow
clearance.)

5. Remove the entire Option 19 fault relay assembly from the Model 1088B.

6. The location for the optional resistor is shown on the circuit board as R1. Directly below this
lettering on the board is a via (a plated-through hole connecting the two board layers). Using
a number 60 (.040) or larger drill bit, carefully enlarge the via to remove the plating, which
will break the connection between the two layers. CAUTION: The via is the middle of three
holes; be careful not to drill out either of the two outside holes.

7. Install a 100 ohm, 0.5 watt resistor (or the value of your choice) between the two outside
holes, and solder into place.

8. Re-attach the connector to the Option 19 circuit board, using care to insure the proper
polarity.

9. Install the Option 19 assembly back into the Model 1088B, and secure in place with the two
mounting screws.

10. Replace the instrument top cover, and secure with the four T-25 screws.

Figure C.21: Option 19 Relay Relay Board with Resistor

C.16 Option 20A: Four Fiber Optic Outputs 165

C.16 Option 20A: Four Fiber Optic Outputs

Purpose
When installed, the Option 20A provides four individually selectable fiber-optic outputs with Type
ST connectors and 820nm transmitters compatible with multimode fiber.

Specifications
Each fiber-optic output is jumper-configurable to each of the standard digital (CMOS) signal out-
puts. Analog signals, IRIG-B Modulated, and ±5V Recorder are not selectable.
Option 20A provides an optical power output of -15dBm minimum (-12dBm typical) into 62.5/125-
µm fiber.
The optical signal is ON whenever the selected logic signal is HI. Transmitter bandwidth is com-
patible with all available logic signals.
Option 20A may be installed in either Slot A or B of the standard Model 1088A/B clock.

Output Enable (JMP1)

This jumper is used at the factory for setting the output enable for the optical transmitters. For
normal operation, set jumper to position “A”. With two clocks containing Option 18 and configured
for redundant operation, this jumper may be set to position “B”, allowing the optical outputs to
be externally paralleled and driven by the on-line clock. Normally, this jumper will be configured
as required when delivered from the factory.

Output Jumper Enable (JMP2 – JMP5)

The standard digital (CMOS) output signals can be selected for output via one of the fiber-optic
output transmitters by setting jumpers JMP2 through JMP5 on the Fiber-Optic Option Board as
illustrated in Figure C.22.
The following tables provide a list of jumper to corresponding output transmitter and a list digital
signals available for configuration to a fiber-optic output connector. The same signals are available
via each jumper (JMP2 - JMP5) and corresponding setting.

Firmware Configuration
No firmware configuration is necessary for the Option 20A.
166 Options List

Output Transmitter Jumper Pin Signal Notes

CR1 JMP2 1 IRIG-B 1, 2, 3
CR2 JMP3 2 IRIG-E 2, 3
CR3 JMP4 3 IRIG-H 2, 3
CR4 JMP5 4 10 MPPS 2, 3
– – 5 5 MPPS 2, 3
– – 6 1 MPPS 2, 3
– – 7 100 kPPS 2, 3
– – 8 10 kPPS 2, 3
– – 9 1 kPPS 2, 3
– – 10 100 PPS 2, 3
– – 11 60 PPS 2
– – 12 50 PPS 2
– – 13 10 PPS 2, 3
– – 14 1 PPM 2, 3
– – 15 1 PPH 2, 3
– – 16 1 PPS 1, 2, 3
– – 17 Prog. Pulse 1, 2, 3
– – 18 IRIG-B Mod. Manch 2, 3

Table C.6: Option 20A, Four Fiber Optic Output Configuration

1. Signals available on the Model 1093A/B/C

2. Signals available on the Model 1088A/B
3. Signals available on the Model 1084A/B/C
C.16 Option 20A: Four Fiber Optic Outputs 167

Figure C.22: Option 20A Jumper Locations

168 Options List

C.17 Option 23, COMTRADE Sample Rate Generator

C.17.1 General Description
When equipped with the Option 23 COMTRADE Sample Rate Generator, the Satellite-Controlled
Clock generates any one of the 48 standard sampling rates for waveform digitization in 50 or 60
Hz systems which are defined in IEEE Standard C37.111-1991, Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for
Power Systems. Standard COMTRADE Sampling Rates are listed in Tables 1 and 2 (on following
page).
The selected sample rate is available as a 5V CMOS-level square wave in both normal (rising edge
of clock synchronous with 1PPS) and complemented (falling edge of clock synchronous with 1PPS)
polarities. The sampling pulse is synchronized to within 50ns of 1PPS, and has sample-to-sample
jitter less than 1ns.

C.17.2 Principles of Operation

The Option 23 assembly generates sampling signals, which are precisely locked to 1PPS-GPS by
phase locking a precision voltage-controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO) to the internal 1kPPS signal
present in the clock. This VCXO output signal is then divided down to obtain the desired sampling
rate. Synchronization logic is also provided, to ensure that the output divider is synchronized
to 1PPS-GPS. By using a precision VCXO, pulse-to-pulse sampling jitter is held to an absolute
minimum, and is specified not to exceed 1 ns rms. The output signals have a 50% duty cycle
(square wave).

C.17.3 Other Features

The Option 23 assembly includes four configurable BNC outputs, which are in addition to those
available for the standard model clock. Either normal or complemented-polarity COMTRADE
sampling frequency signals may be made available at each of these additional outputs. Furthermore,
any output not configured for a COMTRADE sampling rate output can be used as a general-purpose
configurable output, and can deliver any of the 21 standard signals available in the Model 1088B.
The Option 23 assembly may be installed in the standard option slot available (Slot B).
C.17 Option 23, COMTRADE Sample Rate Generator 169

C.17.4 Specifications
Sampling Rates

Samples/cycle fs for 60 Hz fs for 50 Hz

384 23040 19200
192 11520 9600
128 7680 6400
96 5760 4800
64 3840 3200
48 2880 2400
32 1920 1600
24 1440 1200
16 960 800
12 720 600
8 480 400
6 360 300
4 240 200

Table C.7: Option 23, Sample Rates, fLCM = 384 × fbase

Samples/cycle fs for 60 Hz fs for 50 Hz

3200 192000 160000
1600 96000 80000
800 48000 40000
640 38400 32000
400 24000 20000
320 19200 16000
200 12000 10000
160 9600 8000
128 7680 6400
100 6000 5000
80 4800 4000
64 3840 3200
50 3000 2500
40 2400 2000
32 1920 1600
20 1200 1000
16 960 800
10 600 500
8 480 400
4 240 200

Table C.8: Option 23, Sample Rates, fLCM = 3200 × fbase

170 Options List

C.17.5 Performance
Accuracy: ±50 ns from 1 PPS, max (−10 ns, typical)
Jitter: 1 ns rms, max. pulse to pulse (guaranteed by design, not production tested)

C.17.6 Outputs
Connectors: Four, BNC 50-ohm, configurable
Signals: Normal Polarity COMTRADE Sample Rate, 50% Duty Cycle
Complemented COMTRADE Sample Rate, 50% Duty Cycle
All 21 Other Signals Available in the 1088B Clock

C.17.7 Drive Capability

Digital: 5V CMOS Buffer, 50 Ohms Impedance
Analog: Opamp Buffer, 600 Ohms Impedance

C.17.8 Setup
Setup Menu
The SETUP menu allows the user to modify internal operating firmware parameters within both
the Model 1084A/B/C and Model 1088A/B. The SETUP menu can be easily accessed from the
front panel keyboard.
Figure C.23 illustrates the Option 23 SETUP menu for the standard Model 1088A/B SETUP menu.
However, for clarity only Option 23 is described.

RS-232C Commands
Option 23 can also be configured via the RS-232C interface using one of the following commands:

Configure Option 23
Command: m:rCA, m:rCB
m:rCA configures Option 23 to operate correctly from Option Slot A in the Model 1084A/B/C, or
from the Model 1088B. m:rCB configures Option 23 to operate correctly from Option Slot B from
the Model 1088B only.
Response: C
Where:
m 0 = 50 Hz
1 = 60 Hz
r see Table C.7 or Table C.8 for SAMPLES/CYCLE number.
C.17 Option 23, COMTRADE Sample Rate Generator 171

C.17.9 Option 23, Front Panel Setup

The information provided on this page should help you to configure the Option 23 on the Model
1088B. If you should need additional information on setting up from the front panel keys, please
go to Chapter 9 on page 69.
To enter the Slot B setup menu, press SETUP, until you reach SET OPTION CONTROL, then
press ENTER. Press the UP/DOWN keys to select the desired option number and ENTER key to
confirm the selection.

Figure C.23: Option 23 Front Panel Setup

172 Options List

C.17.10 Changing Hardware Settings via Internal Jumpers

It is necessary to set a jumper in order to assign the output signal to a specific I/O connector. The
following paragraphs describe the procedure for setting these jumpers.

Cover Removal
To change the I/O configuration of the rear-panel connectors, the top cover of the instrument must
be removed. Turn off the instrument, and disconnect the power cord. Using a T-25 driver, remove
the four screws holding the cover (and rack mount ears, if used) in place, and lift the cover off.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE top cover while power is applied. Hazardous voltages are
present while the power cord is connected. Always disconnect the unit from the input power source
before removal of the top cover.
The Option 23 Comtrade Board is illustrated in Figure C.24, which shows the location of all the
jumpers along with a brief description.

Output Function Selection

Jumpers JMP1, JMP2, JMP3, and JMP4 determine the output signals which can be made available
at I/O connectors J2, J3, J4, and J5, respectively. Figure C.24 illustrates the relationship between
these jumpers and the I/O connectors. The first step in setting an I/O channel for a specific
output signal is to move the associated jumper to the location corresponding to the desired signal.
Table C.9 lists the jumper settings required for various signals.

Output Mode Selection

The next step in configuring the I/O connectors is to determine whether the assigned signal is an
analog output or a digital output. This selection is accomplished by setting jumpers JMP5, JMP6,
JMP7, and JMP8 to the appropriate positions. These jumpers correspond to connectors J2, J3,
J4, and J5, respectively (see Figure C.24). If the I/O channel is to be used as a digital output, the
corresponding jumper should be set to position “A”. If the I/O channel is to be used as an analog
output, the jumper should be set to position “C”. Table C.9 lists jumper positions for individual
output signals.
C.17 Option 23, COMTRADE Sample Rate Generator 173

Output Signal Output Function Output Mode

IRIG-B Modulated, 10 Vpp 1 C
Deviation (±5 V) 2 C
IRIG-B 3 A
IRIG-E 4 A
IRIG-H 5 A
10 MPPS 6 A
5 MPPS 7 A
1 MPPS 8 A
100 kPPS 9 A
10 kPPS 10 A
1 kPPS 11 A
100 PPS 12 A
60 PPS 13 A
50 PPS 14 A
10 PPS 15 A
IRIG-D/1 PPM 16 A
1 PPH 17 A
1 PPS 18 A
Programmable Pulse 19 A
Out of Lock 20 A
IRIG-B Modified Manchester 21 A
Normal Polarity COMTRADE 22 A
Complemented Polarity COMTRADE 23 A

Table C.9: Option 23, Output Signal Selection Jumper Settings

174 Options List

Figure C.24: Option 23 Internal Jumper Setup

C.18 Option 27: 8-Channel High Drive 175

C.18 Option 27: 8-Channel High Drive

C.18.1 General Description
Option 27 provides eight independent, IRIG-B buffered outputs, each capable of driving multiple
loads. Outputs are short circuit and surge protected. Each output is individually configurable for
either modulated or unmodulated IRIG-B signals via jumper settings as illustrated in Figure C.25.

C.18.2 Specifications
Output Selection Each output is jumper selectable for either a Modulated or Unmodulated signal.
See Figure C.25 for jumper locations and configuration settings.

Number of Channels: Eight (8).

Signal Levels:
Modulated: 4.5 Vpp with 20-Ohm source impedance; each channel
will drive a 50-Ohm load to 3 Vpp minimum;

Unmodulated: +5-V open-circuit; +4 V minimum at 250-mA load

load current each channel will drive 25 Schweitzer
SEL-3xx (in parallel) or 50 SEL-2xx (in series/parallel)
relays at 10 mA per relay.

Maximum Load (per driver):

Modulated: No Limit: will drive a short circuit.

Unmodulated: 250-mA peak current; pulse-by-pulse shutdown if load

current exceeds internal limit (self-resetting).

Output Connector
16-position pluggable 5-mm (Phoenix-type) terminal strip with eight 2-position mating connectors.

C.18.3 Option Setup

Using Front Panel Keys
To set up Option 27 from the front-panel keys, please follow the guidelines in Section 6.12.

Using RS-232C Port

To set up Option 27 using the RS-232C port, please follow the guidelines in Section 9.2.13.
176 Options List

Figure C.25: Option 27 Jumper Locations

C.18 Option 27: 8-Channel High Drive 177

C.18.4 Output Load and Loop Example – Unmodulated IRIG-B

When designing circuits for connection to the output bus, several factors must be considered.

1. Loop Resistance

2. Type and quantity of loads connected

3. Maximum loop distance desired

Table C.10 provides a matrix of these factors using the Schweitzer relay(s) as the output load(s).
The loop distance figures were obtained using the following types of Belden Wire (cross-referenced
to corresponding part number):

AWG20 AWG18 AWG16 AWG14 AWG12

Shielded 8762 8760 8719 8720 8718

Non-Shielded 8205 8461 8471 8473 8477

Table C.10: Example, Output Load and Loop Distance Matrix

1. Output Load and Voltage Drop, # SEL-3xx is the number of relays connected as output load.
2. For SEL-2xx, using pairs of relays with inputs of each pair in series, the maximum number of relays
is two times that for SEL-3xx.
3. Using 2 drivers in parallel. Parallel connection may be made using AWG22 wire.
178 Options List

C.18.5 Connecting Load(s) to Output Bus

The following example illustrates use of different types of SEL relays connected to the output bus.
Total Load Current: 250 mA (peak) per driver or less.

Note 1:
Shielding is optional. However, if shielding is used, connect drain wire at source end of cable to a
local surge ground. Maintain shielding throughout bus by connecting drain wires together at each
junction or drop point. Do not connect drain wires at ends of cables. Do not connect drain wires
to signal wires. Do not connect shield to ground at more than one location, as this may result in
circulating currents.
C.18 Option 27: 8-Channel High Drive 179

C.18.6 Output Loading (Modulated IRIG-B)

Driving modulated IRIG-B loads is simpler than for unmodulated IRIG-B loads because input
impedances are substantially greater (several kilohms typically); and most modulated IRIG-B
loads include some sort of leveling or AGC amplifier, providing tolerance for signal level variations.
Consequently, modulated IRIG-B loads may be connected with greater ease; Arbiter Systems rec-
ommends that your simply calculate the effective parallel load impedance of the parallel-connected
loads. As long as the load impedance is 50 ohms or more per driver, and the loads will accept a
3 Vpp minimum signal level, and the connecting lines are short (5 ohms or less loop resistance),
then no further analysis is required.
As with unmodulated signals, two or more drivers may be paralleled if desired. Unlike the
current-limited unmodulated IRIG-B drivers, the modulated IRIG-B drivers are impedance-limited
and will operate properly into any load impedance, including a short circuit.
If the loop resistance is greater than 5 ohms, then it may be treated as additional source
resistance in series with the 20-ohm driver impedance. This source resistance then forms a voltage
divider with the load. See calculation for “Output Level at Load” below by using Equation C.1.

For Example (see figure below)

Using Equation C.1 to calculate the Output Level at Load;

Rload
(C.1) V = × 4.5
RS + Rloop + Rload

Source impedance of driver: 20 ohms

Loop Resistance: 10 ohms
Load Resistance: 75 ohms
Output Level at Load V = (75 ÷ 105) × 4.5 = 3.2V pp
180 Options List

C.19 Option 28: Time, Frequency and Phase Monitor

C.19.1 General Description
This document describes Option 28 Power System Time, Frequency, and Phase Monitor, which is
used in the Arbiter Systems line of standard Satellite-Controlled Clocks.

C.19.2 Discussion
Option 28 provides the clock with the ability to accept either a 50Hz or 60Hz, 30-300 Vrms input
signal and measure the instantaneous phase, magnitude and frequency of the fundamental compo-
nent while rejecting the effects of harmonics, noise and DC offsets. This option also integrates total
time deviation, which is system time minus GPS time. Measurement results may be output via
the rear-panel RS-232 connector or displayed on the front panel. To determine phase shift across
a transmission line, the measured phase angles from two units placed at the ends of the line are
subtracted and normalized into the range of 0 − 360 (or ±180) degrees. By subtracting the two
measurements of absolute phase, which are measured using the same (GPS time) reference, the
reference cancels leaving the phase angle between the two units: A − B = (A − R) − (B − R).

C.19.3 System Reference Connection

To connect the Option 28 board to the system reference input perform the following steps:

1. Connect System Reference (50 or 60 Hz signal) input to the Option 28 assembly, using the
6m (20 ft.) length of twinaxial cable provided. Strip the unterminated end of this cable and
prepare it as required for termination to your System Reference signal. Do not connect the
shield of the cable at the reference input end.

2. Attach this cable to the Option 28 System Reference input. Hold the cable connector by its
body (not by the rotating locking ring) and rotate it inside the twin-BNC connector until
you feel it begin to mate with the twin-BNC input of the Option 28 assembly. Once the
connectors begin to mate, then use the locking ring to secure the connectors together.

NOTE: The supplied cable is terminated at one end with a twin-BNC connector which mates with
the system reference input of the Option 28 board.
CAUTION: The twin-BNC connector, unlike a standard BNC connector, will only mate properly
in one orientation, and any attempt to force the connector into position with the locking ring when
it is improperly oriented (as may be done with standard BNC connectors) will not work, and may
damage the connector.

C.19.4 Firmware Configuration

To set up Option 28 from the front-panel keys, please follow the guidelines in Section 6.12, on
page 55. For Slot B option, select 28 and press the ENTER key.
You will be given additional setup choices for Option 28; Set System Time Dev?, Set UTC/Local
Time, Set 50/60 Hz Input, and Return to Main Menu. Select the desired choices. When complete
(if this is the first time these options have been activated), turn the clock OFF and back ON again
to initialize the Option Boards.
C.19 Option 28: Time, Frequency and Phase Monitor 181

Using RS-232C Port

To set up Option 28 using the RS-232C port, please follow the guidelines in Section 9.2.13 on
page 90.

Viewing Option 28 Information

View the deviations on the front panel display as follows:
1. To view the System voltage and phase angle, press the EVENT/DEVIATION key on the
front panel:
System Input 114.91 V
Phase 359.60◦
2 To view ∆ F and ∆ T, press the EVENT/DEVIATION key a second time:
System ∆ F -0.0010 Hz
∆ T +0.0000 Sec
3 To view System frequency and time, press the EVENT/DEVIATION key a third time:
System Frq 59.993 Hz
Time [Link].4327
NOTE: Selection of Option 28 results in the deactivation of the Event front panel displays. The
event displays may be re-enabled if desired, by entering the SET EVENT/DEVIATION menu and
following the procedure below. This choice is only available when Option 28 is installed in the unit.
4 Use the SETUP key and access the SET EVENT DEVIATION? setup menu. Press ENTER
to display the following:
DISPLAY OPT 28 ONLY?
UP = YES DOWN = NO
5 To view Option 28 only, press the UP key, then press the front panel key EVENT /DEVIA-
TION to display Option 28 measurement information.
6 To enable Event/Deviation A and B displays as well, press the DOWN key and config-
ure the Channel Mode, Time, and Recorder Channel. Then press the front-panel key
EVENT/DEVIATION to sequentially display all three channels. For a detailed description,
refer to Section 5.2.2.

C.19.5 Calibration
The clock is now configured for operation. Calibration for phase and amplitude are not necessary for
most applications, however if necessary, can be performed. Specifically, these calibrations have no
effect on system time and frequency measurements, and are unnecessary if only time and frequency
are required.
Uncalibrated phase accuracy is usually less than 0.3 degree, and can be reduced to 0.1 degree typical
and 0.2 degree guaranteed with calibration. Uncalibrated amplitude accuracy is usually less than
1%, which is the typical performance of this measurement. Amplitude accuracy is not guaranteed,
and amplitude measurements are provided primarily to verify that the unit is properly connected
and receiving the expected signal level.
182 Options List

C.19.6 Phase Calibration

The factory performs phase calibration, and supplies the calibration factor with the assembly. To
be effective, it must be entered into the clock non-volatile memory. Entering this factor into the
clock requires connecting the clock to a computer or terminal via the RS-232 interface (see clock
manual). For the computer, use a terminal-emulation program such as Procomm or Windows
Terminal. Send the character “V” to the clock to check that connections and port settings are
correct. The clock should respond with the firmware dates in the format “01 Jan 1997 Op28 02
Jan 1997.”
To send the phase calibration factor to the clock, key in the message:
[Link],1088PC
Where [Link] is the calibration factor in degrees, for example “-0.16”; and 1088 is the clock model
number (a security key to prevent unintentional modification):
-0.16,1088PC

C.19.7 Amplitude Calibration

For amplitude calibration, the format is similar, replacing “PC” with “RV”. The calibration factor
(supplied with boards having a serial number with prefix greater than 97420) is approximately
1.0, and is multiplied by the measured result to generate the displayed value. If an accurate ac
source at 50 or 60 Hz is available (for example, the Arbiter Systems, Inc. Model 1040C Panel
Meter Calibrator), the error (for boards with prefix 97420) can be measured and the correction
factor entered as described. For example, if applying 120 Vrms to the Option 28 assembly, and
the display indicates 119.1 Vrms, the calibration factor is (120.0 / 119.1) or 1.0076. You would
enter “1.0076,1088RV” to calibrate the unit (model 1088A/B). The display should then read close
to 120.0 Vrms. To clear the calibration factor, you may set the unit to factory defaults or send the
command “1,1088RV.”
C.19 Option 28: Time, Frequency and Phase Monitor 183

C.19.8 Option 28 Firmware Setup Procedure

Figure C.26: Option 28 Firmware Setup Procedure

184 Options List

C.19.9 Option 28–Specific RS-232 Commands

The following symbols and syntax are used throughout the RS-232 Commands listing and are
repeated here for emphasis:

C Shorthand for Carriage–Return, Line–Feed.

“A” Channel A.
“B” Channel B.
“U” UTC Time, Channel A (or B).
“L” Local Time, Channel A (or B).

Fourteen (14) RS-232 commands are available with Option 28. The following conventions apply to
all RS-232 communications:

• Phase angle, in all messages, is defined as zero (or 360) for the positive-going zero crossing
coincident with 1PPS-GPS, and is scaled between zero and 360 degrees. Phase angle increases
with frequency below nominal (50 or 60 Hz) and decreases with frequency above nominal;
in other words, if the zero crossing occurs just after 1PPS-GPS, the phase angle will be just
above zero, and if the zero crossing occurs just prior to 1PPS-GPS, phase angle will be just
under 360.

• Time deviation decreases (becomes more negative) with frequency below nominal, and in-
creases (becomes more positive) with frequency above nominal.
C.19 Option 28: Time, Frequency and Phase Monitor 185

C.19.10 Option 28 Commands

Return System Frequency

Command: FS
“FS” returns Option 28 system frequency.

Response: C
SS [Link]
Where: SS = UTC seconds
[Link] = frequency

Return System Frequency Deviation

Command: FD
“FD” returns the system frequency deviation.

Response: C
SS±[Link]
Where: SS = UTC seconds
[Link] = frequency

Return System Phase

Command: PS
“PS” returns the system phase.

Response: SS±[Link] C
Where: SS = UTC seconds
[Link] = phase, 0 to 360 degrees

Return System Time Deviation

Command: TD
“TD” returns the system time deviation.

Response: SS±[Link] C
Where: SS = UTC seconds
[Link] = time deviation

Return System Time

Command: TS
“TS” returns the Option 28 system time.
186 Options List

Response: MM/DD/YYYYU hh:mm:[Link] SS C

Where: “MM” = Month “hh” = hour
“DD” = Day of Year “mm” = minute
“YYYY” = Year “[Link]” = seconds
“U (L) = UTC (Local) “SS” = UTC seconds

Set Option 28 System Time, UTC

Command: SU
“SU” sets the Option 28 to reflect system time in UTC format.
Response: C
Set Option 28 System Time, Local
Command: SL
“SL” sets the Option 28 to reflect system time in Local format.
Response: C
Return System Status
Command: SM
“SM” returns the Option 28 system status.

Response: hC
Where (h): 0 = System OK
1 = No System Reference
2 = System okay now but reference lost since last request

Start Broadcast Mode–Vorne

Command: B2
“B2” configures RS-232 broadcast mode to support Vorne large format time displays. Data is
transmitted ahead of time, and the <BEL> character is transmitted on time. When properly
configured, the Vorne display updates simultaneously upon receipt of the first bit of the <BEL>
character. Refer to Arbiter Systems Application Note 103 for more information.

Response: 11nn C Out-Of-Lock Time

1/second 44hhmmss C UTC/Local Time
22±[Link] Frequency Deviation
33±[Link] C Time Deviation*
34±[Link] C Time Deviation*
66hhmmss C System Time
[Link] C System Frequency
[Link] C System Phase
C.19 Option 28: Time, Frequency and Phase Monitor 187

[Link] C System Magnitude

55ddd C Day of Year
<BEL> <BEL> = hex 07

The decimal points shown above are not actually transmitted in the data stream, but their position
is implied. The displays are configured to show the decimal point in this position.
*Time Deviation is output in two formats in the same data stream: 33±[Link] and 34±[Link].
Output for the 33±[Link] format will be +[Link] when the measured value exceeds +9.99 (b = blank).
It will be -[Link] when the measured value is less than -9.99.
Output for the 34±[Link] format will observe the following conventions for out-of-range values and
leading blanks. Decimal points are implicit and do not appear in the data stream.

Time Deviation Range Format (b=blank)

Below -999.99 -[Link]
-999.99 to -100.00 -[Link]
-99.99 to -10.00 -[Link]
-9.99 to -0.01 -[Link]
+0.00 to +9.99 +[Link]
+10.00 to +99.99 +[Link]
+100.00 to +999.99 +[Link]
Above +999.99 +[Link]

Table C.11: Option 28 B2 Broadcast, Time Deviation Values

188 Options List

Start Broadcast Mode–ASCII

Command: B7, O7
“B7” configures the Standard RS-232 broadcast mode to send Time, Frequency, and Phase Devi-
ation, once per second, in ASCII format. “O7” configures the Option RS-232 broadcast mode to
send Time, Frequency and Phase Deviation, once per second, in ASCII format.

Response: broadcast mode, UTC:

mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ssU ss +[Link] +[Link] [Link] [Link] C
broadcast mode, Local:
mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ssL ss +[Link] +[Link] [Link] [Link] C
Where:
mm/dd/yyyy = Date
hh:mm:ssU = Time of Day, UTC
(or)
hh:mm:ssL = Time of Day, Local
ss = Status
first character is Reference Status:
0 : Locked;
1 : Unlocked;
second character is clock status per IEEE 1344
+[Link] signed Frequency Error in Hz.
+[Link] signed Time Deviation in seconds.
[Link] Phase Angle, 0 to 360 degrees.
[Link] Line voltage, rms Volts.

Set Measured System Deviation

Command: (-)[Link]
“(-)[Link]” sets the system deviation.
Response: C
Where: s = 0 to ±2000 seconds
fs = fractional seconds

Set Phase Calibration

Command: p:kPC
“p:kPC” sets the phase calibration offset. Phase offset is stored in protected RAM.
Response: C
Where: p = Phase Offset in degrees
k = Security Key (e.g. 1088)
C.19 Option 28: Time, Frequency and Phase Monitor 189

Set Voltage Amplitude Correction

Command: v:kRV
“v:kRV” sets the system voltage amplitude correction.

Response: C
Where: v = Voltage correction per unit with 1.000000 equal to no correction.
k = Security Key (e.g. 1088)

Return Time, Frequency, Phase Deviation with UTC Time

Command: nPD
“nPD” returns the System Time, Frequency and Phase Deviation with a UTC time reference, at
each issuance of the command.

Response:
(when n = 0) mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ssU ss +[Link] +[Link] [Link] [Link] C
(when n = 1) mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ssL ss +[Link] +[Link] [Link] [Link]

Where:
mm/dd/yyyy = Date
hh:mm:ssU = Time of Day, UTC
(or)
hh:mm:ssL = Time of Day, Local
ss = Status (0 = Locked, 1 = Unlocked)
(first character is Reference Status:)
(second character is clock status per IEEE 1344)

+[Link] signed Frequency Error in Hz.

+[Link] signed Time Deviation in seconds.
[Link] Phase Angle, 0 to 360 degrees.
[Link] Line voltage, rms Volts.
190 Options List

C.20 Option 29: Four Additional Outputs; Dry Contacts; +25/50

Vdc
C.20.1 General Description
This document describes Option 29: Four Additional Outputs With Dry Contact and +25/50
VDC. Option 29 includes six configurable outputs. Four are standard, 5V CMOS outputs; two are
Aromat AQV210E solid-state relays (SSRs). A +25 or +50VDC supply is available on-board and
may be switched by the SSR outputs.

C.20.2 Specifications
General
Connector 16-position, 5mm Pluggable Terminal Strip. Four 2-position
and two 4-position mating connectors provided. The connec-
tors accept wire sizes of 0.25 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12 to 22).
See Table C.13 and Figure C.28 for Connector Configuration.

Digital Outputs
Quantity 4
Type: 5V CMOS, individually configurable
Rating: +5V open-circuit, nominal
75mA peak current, per channel
+3.5V typical at 75mA peak current
Available Signals: Jumper selectable to any of the digital signals available from
the clock mainframe. See Figure C.27 for Jumper location
and selections.

Solid State Relay Output

Quantity: 2
Type: Aromat AQV210E solid-state relays, 130 mA AC or DC at
350 V peak.
Rating: Limited to 100 mA DC, 140 Vrms / 180 V peak by fuse and
surge suppression devices.
Timing: Propagation Delay, 90 µs Nominal, to 50%.
Rise Time, 50 µs Nominal, 20-80%.
C.20 Option 29: Four Additional Outputs; Dry Contacts; +25/50 Vdc 191

Solid State Relay Output, continued

Power Supply: Individually configurable for 0 VDC, +25 VDC, or +50 VDC.
Available Signals: 1 PPH, 1 PPM, 1 PPS, Programmable Pulse, Locked and
Out of Lock.
Pulse Width: Individually configurable for a fixed, 50-ms pulse, or the de-
fault width of pulse provided by the clock mainframe.
Available 1. Dry contact closure.
Configurations: 2. Contact closure to ground.
3. +25/50 VDC switched for grounded load
4. +25/50 VDC with contact closure to ground for non-
grounded load.
See Table C.12: Operating Modes of SSR Outputs.

Mode SSR Output 1 SSR Output 2

Dry Contact Closure Connect load to pins 10 & 11 Connect load to pins 14 & 15
(polarity not important) (polarity not important)
Contact Closure to Short pins 9 & 10, connect Short pins 13 & 14, connect
Ground load to pin 11 load to pin 15
+25/50 VDC Switched Short pins 11 & 12, connect Short pins 15 & 16, connect
to Grounded Load load to pins 9 (-) & 10 (+) load to pins 13 (-) & 14 (+)
+25/50 VDC Switched Short pins 9 & 10, connect Short pins 13 & 14, connect
to Floating Load load to pins 11 (-) & 12 (+) load to pins 15 (-) & 16 (+)

Table C.12: Option 29, Operating Modes of SSR Outputs

192 Options List

Pin Function Setup Jumpers–Default Settings

1 (Rightmost) CMOS Output 1 JMP4: Signal Select Default = 1 PPH
2 Ground –
3 CMOS Output 2 JMP3: Signal Select Default = 1 PPM
4 Ground –
5 CMOS Output 3 JMP2: Signal Select Default = Prog. Pulse
6 Ground –
7 CMOS Output 4 JMP1: Signal Select Default = IRIG-B
8 Ground –
9 Ground –
10 SSR Output 1 JMP5: Signal Select Default = 1 PPM
11 SSR Output 1 JMP7: Standard/50 ms Default = 50 ms
12 +25/50VDC 1 JMP10: +25/50VDC Default = 50 VDC
13 Ground –
14 SSR Output 2 JMP6: Signal Select Default = 1 PPM
15 SSR Output 2 JMP8: Standard/50 ms Default = 50 ms
16 (Leftmost) +25/50VDC 2 JMP11: +25/50 VDC Default = 50 VDC

Table C.13: Option 29, Output Connectors and Setup Jumpers

C.20.3 Firmware Configuration

1. It is necessary to verify the configuration in the Option Setup Menu so Option 29 is recognized.

2. Apply power and observe the front panel display; when it displays “CLOCK STATUS
STARTUP,” press the SETUP key.

3. Press the SETUP key until SET OPTION CONTROL? appears.

4. Press ENTER twice so that “AUX. BOARD OPTION” appears. Press the UP key so that
the option number indicates “29” and press ENTER.

5. Press any of the upper row of keys to exit the setup menus.
C.20 Option 29: Four Additional Outputs; Dry Contacts; +25/50 Vdc 193

C.20.4 Output Jumper Setting Changes

1. Set Line Power switch to OFF position (if equipped). Disconnect the power cord from rear-
panel.

2. Remove rack-mount ears (if equipped) and remove top cover using a T25 Torx driver (4
screws).

3. Locate the appropriate Jumper using Figure C.27 and move the jumper to the desired setting.

4. Replace the top cover and rack-mount ears (if equipped).

5. Connect the power cord to the rear-panel and set the Line Power switch to ON position (if
equipped).

Figure C.27: Option 29 Jumper Locations

194 Options List

Figure C.28: Option 29 Connector − Signal Locations

C.21 Option 32/33: NTP Server – Obsoleted by Opt34 195

C.21 Option 32/33: NTP Server – Obsoleted by Opt34

C.21.1 General Description
Option 32 is a single internal Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server (Port 1), and used in the
Arbiter Systems line of 19-inch, rack mount Satellite-Controlled Clocks. Option 33 is very similar
to Option 32, however it has two identical and independent NTP servers (Port 1 and Port 2). Both
options come with a six-foot phone cable and RJ-11 to DB-9F connector for connecting to the
RS-232, or NTP Setup, port. For Model 1088B clocks, the NTP Status display should indicate as
follows:
NTP1(2): SYNCHRONIZED (ERROR)
NETWORK: GOOD LINK (BAD LINK)

Option 32/33
Option 32/33 allows the clock to act as time server over an Ethernet network using the network
time protocol operating in server mode - symmetric operation modes are not supported. Time is
distributed over the network interface to computers, controllers and other equipment needing the
correct time. Option 32/33 understands NTP Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 frames, and
optionally supports authentication via DES and MD5 cryptographic checksums. If authentication
is not used, the controller can typically be used for hundreds of clients without overloading it. Au-
thentication requires typically 40 ms for checking and generating the cryptograms, which is covered
and averaged out by the protocol. Option 32/33 supports full SNTP and all NTP functions required
for reliable server operation. Functions not required for server operation are not implemented.
Hardware Configuration.
Option 32/33 consists of two building blocks; an OEM NTP module (Option 33 has two) and an
interface to the GPS clock. Option 32/33 is connected to the main board via the standard 50 pin
option cable, and has three external connectors, an RS-232 (RJ-11) and two 10/100 Base-T (RJ
45). The center RJ-45 connector is not used in the Option 32. In addition to the connectors there
are six status LED’s on the rear panel. Three LEDs are used in the Option 32 at Port 1, and six
LEDs are used in the Option 33. See Figure C.29.
External Connectors
The RS-232 connector can be used to interrogate the clock or to configure the NTP module de-
pending on the jumper settings (see Section C.21.2 Jumper Settings). The port parameters are set
to 9600, N, 8, 1. This RS-232 port is not operational during normal use. The Ethernet port is used
to distribute time and can also be used to configure the NTP module.

Figure C.29: Option 32/33

Rear Panel
196 Options List

RS-232, NTP Setup

The RS-232 port uses an RJ-11 style connector, which is configured as a DTE device with the
following pin out:

GND = Pin 2 TXD = Pin 3 RXD = Pin 4 GND = Pin 5

10/100 Base-T
Option 32/33 uses the standard 10/100 base-T connection for connecting to an Ethernet. Fig-
ure C.29 indicates the location of pin 1 (two places for Option 33).

TXD+ = Pin 1 TXD– = Pin 2 RXD+ = Pin 3 RXD– = Pin 6

Status LED’s
There are three active status LED’s on the rear panel of Option 32; six active LED’s on the Option
33. The LED’s are Link (green), Synch (green) and Error (red). Option 32/33 will perform an
initial self test when powered on. After the initial self-test phase, where all status LEDs should be
lit, the LED’s indicate the status of the NTP Server.

Link LED
Link (green) LED on: Ethernet 10/100 base-T connection is good.

Synch LED
Synch (green) LED on: synchronized to the time signal, correct reception of time data, requires
the satellite controlled clock to be synchronized.
Synch LED flashing 50% duty cycle: Some information received, but not yet synchronized reliably.

Error LED
If the Error LED is on or blinking the Synch LED will give a diagnostics code.
Error (red) LED stable on, Synch (green) LED flashing

1x: EPROM-checksum error

2x: RAM-error
3x: Network controller error
4x: EEPROM checksum error, or is bad
5x: IP address already used on network

Error LED flashing, Synch LED flashing

4x: Faulty network connection
5x: No DHCP response was received
C.21 Option 32/33: NTP Server – Obsoleted by Opt34 197

C.21.2 Jumper Settings.

There are five jumpers on Option 32/33. Jumper 1 (JMP1) is determined by the clock model;
Jumper 2 (JMP2) determines board operation with JMP3 and JMP4; Jumper 3 (JMP3) determines
board operation with JMP2 and JMP4; JMP2 and JMP3 always move as a pair; Jumper 4 is used
with configuring NTP servers over the RS-232 port; Jumper 5 sets the board for Option 32 or 33.
See jumper settings in Table C.14.

Jumper Position Option Mode (Rev.B and following) Rev.A Board Modes
JMP1 A Determined by Model 1088B (same)
B Det. by Model 1084A/B/C or 1093A/B/C (same)
JMP2 A NTP Server(s) (same)
B Clock serial port (same)
C Configure NTP Server 1* via RS-232 only (same)
D Configure NTP Server 2* via RS-232 only (same)
JMP3 A NTP Server(s) (same)
B Clock serial port (same)
C Configure NTP Server 1* via RS-232 only (same)
D Configure NTP Server 2* via RS-232 only (same)
JMP4 A NTP Server(s) NTP Configuration
B NTP Configuration NTP Server(s)
JMP5 A Option 33 (same)
B Option 32 (same)

Table C.14: Option 32/33 Jumper Truth Table

*Must set JMP4 into the B position – Configuration mode
For Model 1088B only – to allow bi-directional communication from the Option 32/33 RS-232
port (RJ-11 connector), configure Slot B option for Option 17A.

Figure C.30: Option 32/33 Board, Jumper Locations

198 Options List

C.21.3 Firmware Configuration.

Setup for Option 32/33 operation is in two parts: (1) setting the correct option number (i.e. 32 or
33) via the front panel, or through the RS-232 port; (2) configuring the NTP server(s) via the the
individual Ethernet port, or option RS-232 port.

Front Panel
1. Apply power and observe the front panel display; press the SETUP key when it displays
“CLOCK STATUS STARTUP”.
2. Navigate through the series of menu selections, using either the DOWN, UP or SETUP key,
until “SET OPTION CONTROL?” appears; press ENTER; the display should read “SET
AUX. BOARD?”
3. Press the UP or DOWN key to select 32 or 33 and ENTER.
4. Press any of the upper row of keys to exit the configuration menu.

RS-232 Port
To set up Option 32/33 using the main clock RS-232 port, you will need to use a terminal program
like HyperTerminal or Tera Term Pro. Type the following in the terminal window, “1,8,1088XI”
set the .

NTP Module.
The NTP module can be configured over the appropriate Ethernet port or the option RS-232 port.
The Ethernet is the preferred port to configure, with no required jumper changes.

Ethernet
Initially, NTP servers are programmed with the IP address of [Link]. To configure the NTP
module over the network, establish a Telnet connection to port 9999. If the IP address of the NTP
Server (NTS) is unknown or undefined, the following sets a temporary IP address:
a) Set a static ARP with the desired IP address using the hardware address of the NTS, which is
printed on the product label. Alternately, you can calculate the address from the serial number.
Below is the command example for WinXP, using the DOS prompt, when the hardware address of
the NTS is 00-20-4A-02-64-0B.
arp -s [Link] 00-20-4A-02-64-0B
NOTE: In order for the ARP command to work in Windows, the ARP table on the PC must have
at least one IP address defined other than its own. Type “ARP A” at the DOS command prompt
to verify that there is at least one entry in the ARP table. If there is no other entry beside the
local machine, ping another IP machine on your network to build the ARP table. This has to be a
host other than the machine that you’re working on. Once there is at least one entry in the ARP
table, use the listed commands to ARP an IP address to the NTP Server.
The command example for most Unix systems is:
arp -s [Link] [Link]
b) Open a telnet connection to port number 1. This connection will fail, but the NTS will change
its IP address to the desired one in that step, e.g.
telnet [Link] 1
C.21 Option 32/33: NTP Server – Obsoleted by Opt34 199

c) Open a telnet connection to port 9999 and set all required parameters.
telnet [Link] 9999
NOTE: The temporary IP address is reverted after every power reset of the NTS. Be sure to enter
the configuration and store the parameters to make the changes permanent.
After making a connection to configure the NTP server (either through the Ethernet or RS-232
port), the screen should display the top four lines; to enter the Setup Mode, you must press Enter
on the terminal (pc).

*** NTS ***

MAC address 00204AAB5F03
Software version V5.8.13.RC2 (050126) CPK 580 M100
Press Enter to go into Setup Mode
*** basic parameters
Hardware: Ethernet TPI
IP addr [Link], no gateway set
*** Security
SNMP is enabled
SNTP Community Name: public
Telnet Setup is enabled
TFTP Download is enabled
Port 77FEh is enabled
ECHO is enabled
*** NTS parameters
Antenna Type: GPS/Arbiter
SNTP [Link]: ‘‘gps2"
Encryption is disabled
Sending UDP datagram to Port 024C(hex) every 000 minutes
Send UDP datagram to:
Change Setup:
0 Basic configuration
1 NTS configuration
6 Security
7 Factory defaults
8 Exit without save
9 save and exit Your choice ?

Serial

An ASCII terminal or PC with a terminal emulation can be connected to the option RS-232 port,
but JMP2 and JMP3 must be set to “C” (for Ethernet Port 1) or “D” (for Ethernet Port2), and
JMP4 set to “B”. The terminal (or PC) should be configured to 9600 Baud, 8 data-bits, 1- stop
bit, no parity. The power must be cycled to enter the configuration mode. The self-test begins
after power-up. About a half-second later the Error (red) LED starts blinking. Now send three
200 Options List

lowercase ‘x’ characters to the NTP Server. These characters must all be sent within one second
to start configuration mode.
NOTE: The easiest way to enter configuration mode is to hold down the ‘x’ key at the terminal
(emulation) and then powering the NTP Server. This will ensure that the x characters will arrive
in time.

C.21.4 General Configuration

After entering the configuration mode (confirmed with <CR>), the parameters can be changed;
confirm default values with the enter key. Leaving the setup mode after selecting function 9 stores
all parameters in a nonvolatile memory, and the NTP server resets.

C.21.5 Basic Parameters

To change the basic parameters, type ‘0’. The following values can be set/changed:
Ethernet Interface: Set to (N).
IP Address: The IP address must be set to a unique value in your network. If the NTP Server is
set to an address, which is already in use, it will display an error code with the LEDs (see “LED
Status”) and will not connect to the network.
Gateway IP Address: The router/gateway address is needed to communicate to other LAN
segments. The default gateway must be set to address the router that connects these segments.
This address must be within the local network. If in doubt, consult the network administrator.
Net mask: A net mask defines how many bits from the IP address are to be taken as the network
section and how many bits are to be taken as the host section (reminder: Standard class A 8/24
[net/host], class B 16/16, class C 24/8 bits). If set to 0, the standard appropriate net mask for the
actual IP address is used. The NTS prompts for the number of host bits, and then calculates the
net mask. It is shown in standard format “[Link]” when parameters are displayed.
Telnet Config Password: The Telnet configuration password can be set to disable unauthorized
access to the setup menu through a Telnet connection to the setup port (9999). For the setup
through the serial port, it is not necessary to enter the password. The controller can be configured
over a Telnet connection to port 9999 (assuming the network parameters are set correctly and the
NTS is connected to the network).

C.21.6 NTP Server Parameters

The network operations of the server are controlled by various parameters.
Antenna Type: Set type to 6=GPS/Arbiter
UDP-Port: The UDP port selects the port number for the NTP proprietary protocol.
Send Block Every n Minutes: This parameter determines how often the data block should be
sent.
Send UDP-Broadcast: If the time information should be sent to all devices connected to this
LAN (broadcast), set this parameter to “Y” = yes.
UDP-Target Address: This parameter determines the target addresses to which the data block
should be sent. The data block can be sent over a Gateway or other devices to another part of the
network. The maximum number of defined addresses is eight. NTP and UDP/time port numbers
C.21 Option 32/33: NTP Server – Obsoleted by Opt34 201

are fixed to the values defined in RFC-37 and RFC-123 respectively. If the authentication option
is enabled, up to seven MD5 or DES keys can be entered (key numbers 1..7). All key input must
be done in hexadecimal format; MD5 key length is limited to eight characters.
When leaving the setup mode after selecting function 9 all parameters are stored in a nonvolatile
memory and the NTP server resets. Select 8 to exit without saving modifications.
202 Options List

C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server

C.22.1 General Description
This option provides Network Time Protocol (NTP) and Precision Time Protocol (PTP)1 servers
in the Arbiter Model 1088A/B series GPS clocks. These instructions will assist you in the setup
and operation of the Option 34. Configure this option using the Web Interface or the SSH Console.
Standard configuration includes two copper Ethernet ports. Optionally, order fiber optic con-
nectors. Standard fiber connector is type LC, 62.5/125 m 50/125 m multimode fiber. Other
configurations include two fiber ports, or one copper and one fiber port. Contact the factory for
other connector types.
The Option 34 has two independent server ports that can access either the NTP servers (versions
1, 2, 3 or 4 frames) or the PTP server. This option has been designed in accordance with the latest
NTP and PTP standards and may be updated whenever new firmware is available.
PTP with hardware assist offers much better accuracy than with NTP, however to achieve
these accuracies requires PTP-enabled network components that provide for latency and jitter to
be determined between the clock and each component. When designing for the ultimate in PTP
accuracy, evaluate every component in the complete network.

Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server

The Option 34 allows the clock to act as network (NTP) time server over an Ethernet network and
understands NTP version 1 – 4 frames, while optionally supporting authentication via DES and
MD5 cryptographic checksums as defined in RFC 59052 . The Option 34 supports symmetric key
authentication. Time is distributed over the network interface to computers, controllers and other
equipment with accurate time. The Option 34 allows a secure connection to configure, using either
the preferred HTTPS Web Interface, or using the SSH Console.

Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Server

The Option 34 allows the clock to act as a Precision Time Server (PTP) according to Standard
IEEE 1588 2008. However for highest accuracy, the entire network where PTP is required must
have PTP-enabled network components. Without hardware assist through the physical interface,
PTP will provide time with the same accuracy as with NTP. Accuracy with hardware assist using
PTP should be better than 1 microsecond. Accuracy without hardware assist should be better
than 100 microseconds.

Configuration Protocols
Three types of configuration protocols are allowed on the Option 34: HTTP, HTTPS and Secure
Shell (SSH). Of the three, HTTPS and SSH permit secure channels on the network between the user
and the Option 34. If a secure channel is required, choose either HTTPS using the Web Interface,
or SSH using the Console. HTTPS requires that a valid signed certificate (PEM file) be uploaded
into the Option 34. Use of Console does not require a signed certificate. Both of these methods are
discussed in the following pages, and both require a username and password to open a connection.
To access the option configuration use the Web Interface you will need Web browser. To access the
1
IEEE 1588v2 – IEEE 1588-2008
2
Includes RFC 5906, 5907 and 5908
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 203

Option 34 using the Console, you will need an SSH client. These instructions use an SSH client
called PuTTY when describing the Console Interface. Option 34 comes by default configured for
an HTTP connection, and may be configured to use HTTPS.

C.22.2 Option 34 Setup

This section covers initial setup of the Option 34. Before the Option 34 can serve time accurately,
the clock must be locked to the GPS and stable. Once meeting these conditions, the Option 34 can
provide reliable time to a network. The three subsections below will guide you through this initial
phase of starting up the clock and configuring the Option 34.
The Option 34 can be ordered with either static IP addresses, DHCP assigned IP addresses, or
both static and DHCP. This information should help you decide how to configure the Option 34.
By default, the Option 34 is configured with port 1 assigned a static IP and port 2 assigned by
DHCP.
Note: If your Option 34 has fiber optic connectors installed, do not disconnect cable while clock
is operating or the NTP/PTP service may not recover. If fiber optic cables are disconnected while
clock is operating and service stops, power cycle the clock.

Default Port Addresses

By default, the Option 34 comes configured as follows:

Port 1 IP address -- STATIC: [Link]

Netmask [Link]
Gateway [Link]

Port 2 IP address -- DHCP: [Link]

Selecting the Option 34 in Clock

Before you can use the Option 34 in your clock, make sure that it is selected as an option. To check
the configured option:

1. Press the SETUP key until you reach “SET OPTION CONTROL” and press “ENTER”.
2. The 1088A/B has to option slots: the first is SLOT A. Press ENTER again.
3. Under SLOT B OPTION the second line will give the option name.
4. Use the UP or DOWN key to select “34” and press “ENTER.”
5. “Option 34” should now be selected in the clock.

Option Setup Using RS-232 Commands

To select Option 34, use a terminal program (HyperTerminal or Tera Term3 ) and null-modem cable.
Important pins for a null-modem cable are indicated in Table C.15 below.
1. Open a terminal program at the same baud rate as the clock. For the Model 1088A/B, the
default port settings should be 115,200 baud, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
2. Type the letter “v” to verify communication. It should return the firmware date code.
3
To download a free copy of Tera Term, see Arbiter website at [Link]
204 Options List

PC Port Pins Clock Port Pins Port Function

2 3 Transmit
3 2 Receive
5 5 Ground

Table C.15: Null-Modem Cable Connections

3. For Model 1088A/B type “1,11,1088XI” (without quotes) and the cursor should jump down
to the next line without displaying a question mark.
4. Option 34 should now be selected in your clock.
5. To test it, type “IP” and it should return the IP addresses of the two Ethernet ports. With
no Ethernet cable connected to a port, the IP command will return dashes for the IP address
of that port. The MAC address will still be returned as illustrated below.

NET1:[Link] [Link]XX:XX:XX (Static IP)

NET2:---.---.---.--- [Link]XX:XX:XX (DHCP)

Logging in with the Web Interface

See Section C.22.3 for details on using the web interface.

NTP Status Display Indications

During the stabilization process, the clock will display different status messages that indicate
whether the NTP server is ready to serve time. Clock stabilization requires the clock to be locked
to the GPS for a period of time after which it will provide its time to the Option 34. To view
NTP/PTP status messages, press the SYSTEM key several times until reaching OPTION STATUS,
then press ENTER and the UP or DOWN key.
Server Status: Waiting for clock to lock to satellites.
NTP: PLEASE WAIT
PTP: PLEASE WAIT

Server Status: Waiting for NTP to stabilize (up to 1 hour).

NTP: UNLOCKED
PTP: RUNNING

Server Status: Normal Operation.

NTP: LOCKED
PTP: RUNNING

Server Status: Synchronization problem on the Option 34 – clock may not be locked.
NTP: ERROR
PTP: RUNNING
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 205

After the Clock and Server Have Stabilized

After the GPS clock and the Option 34 have stabilized, press the SYSTEM button to view server
status, link status and port addresses (IP and MAC address).
Server Status
NTP: SYNCHRONIZED
PTP: RUNNING

Link Status: indicates whether the network connection is good or bad. Status will also indicate
BAD LINK if a network cable IS NOT connected to the port.
NET1: GOOD LINK
NET2: BAD LINK

Port Address:
NET1:[Link]
[Link]XX:XX:XX

To Determine IP Address using RS-232 Commands

Type “IP” in the terminal window and the clock should return the IP and MAC addresses for both
ports in separate lines. The IP command will return dashes for an IP address when no cable is
connected to that port.

Option 34 LED Indications

To view the Option 34 Status LEDs, see the Option 34 rear panel. The figure and Table C.16 below
describe the indications.

LED Name Color Meaning

LINK Steady Green Good Link, 10 Mb/s
Steady Yellow Good Link, 100 Mb/s
OFF Bad Link, e.g. no connection

SYNC Steady Green NTP Server Synchronized

OFF NTP Server not Synchronized

ERROR Red Startup/Error

OFF No Errors

Table C.16: Option 34 LED Indications

206 Options List

C.22.3 Web Interface

Instructions in this section cover the setup and maintenance of the Option 34 using the Web
Interface. Configure the Option 34 insecurely through the Web Interface using HTTP, or securely
using HTTPS. Both methods are discussed in this section. Instructions on using the Secure Shell
(SSH) Console Interface for the same purpose are found in Section C.22.4. The Option 34 may
only be configured through one of the Ethernet ports. However, to configure the clock use the front
panel interface, or the serial port.

Making Network Changes Permanent

After making specific network setting changes, the changes will be permanently committed only
after a successful login is detected. These network changes include:

• Changing an IP address between DHCP and Static, or vice versa.

• Changing a port number.
• Changing the web interface between HTTP and HTTPS or vice versa.

It is IMPORTANT to login after making such changes to be sure that the changes are committed
to the system. Alternately, by power cycling the clock before logging back in, the clock will revert
to the old settings.

Logging in to the Web Interface

The Web Interface responds when you open a web browser and type in the IP address of one of
the Option 34 ports. Each IP address may also be viewed in the 1088A/B front panel display if
the port is connected to a network.

Default Port Addresses

Port 1 (NET1) = [Link]
Port 2 (NET2) = DHCP

1. Connect an Ethernet cable between one of the Ethernet ports on the Option 34 and your
network, or directly to your computer.
2. Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the port you have connected your
network cable.
3. Press the ENTER key, which should open the web interface login as seen below.

Username

Password
Login

4. Type in the Username and Password. The Username is “clockoption”, and the default Pass-
word is “password”. The password may be changed from within the web interface (see
page 210).
5. Click the Login button. If you typed in the correct Username and Password, the web interface
should appear as shown in Figure C.31.
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 207

Viewing the IP Address on the Front Panel

The front panel will indicate the IP address of each port provided a network cable is connected.
Press the SYSTEM key until reaching OPTION STATUS OPTION 34 and press the ENTER key.
Use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll to any network-related information, such as the connection (Link)
status, the IP address or hardware address. Press any upper key to exit.

Important Configuration Change Notes

Certain configuration changes will cause you to lose the web interface connection. These configu-
ration changes include:

1. changing from HTTP to HTTPS

2. changing a Network configuration
3. changing a System configuration on the port which you are connected.

If you are making changes to another port, the web interface connection will not be dropped. To
make the changes persist, you will need to re-log in to the web interface using the new setting(s). To
lose changes, reboot the clock. After making any changes to the NTP service, you may experience
a delay of up to five minutes for the NTP service to start.

Startup Page: System

When logging in to the Option 34 using the web interface, the opening screen should be the System
Status information page. This provides an overview of the operation of the Option 34. Figure C.31
illustrates the opening System Status page.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure Password Update Reboot

PTP
Clock System Time 07 Apr 2014 [Link] PDT
Network System Time Offset -108us
System Time Quality Locked
Support NTP Running
PTP Enabled (Running)
SNMP Enabled (Running)
SNMP Traps Enabled
Logout
Temperature 27.8 oC

Figure C.31: Startup Page

208 Options List

System Configure Page

Figure C.32 illustrates the System configuration page for the Option 34. It includes configuring
for HTTP or HTTPS (see next section), enabling session time outs for the web interface and SSH
Console, responding to ping requests and setting your time zone. Time zone setting only changes
the time as it is read on the web interface under the Clock selection. Just as the receiving device
must convert the NTP/PTP time as it arrives at the device to local time zone, so the clock time in
the web interface can display local time. A number of time zone settings are found in Section C.22.7.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure Password Update Reboot

PTP Web Interface
SNMP HTTP HTTPS Port 80
Clock Enable Session Timeout 3 minute(s)
Network
Console Interface
System
Enable Session Timeout 3 minute(s)
Support
Miscellaneous
Respond to Ping Requests
Time Zone Setting PST8PDT7
Logout

Apply Reset

Figure C.32: System Configure Page

C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 209

System Configure HTTPS Page

To configure the HTTPS page, follow these instructions. Figure C.33 shows how configuring for
HTTPS protocol opens up a dialog to upload a PEM file to the Option 34 system. After opening
the System Configuration page (shown in Section C.22.3 click the HTTPS button and it will open
the PEM file dialog shown in Figure C.33. A PEM file includes a private key and signed certificate.
You can either purchase one or generate one yourself. A discussion on generating a PEM file using
a self-signed certificate in Linux may be downloaded from the Arbiter Systems website on the
relevant product page. This method also seems to work fine in the Mac OS X environment.
Notice that the port numbers have changed from 80 with HTTP to 443 with HTTPS.

Web Interface
HTTP HTTPS Port 443
PEM File
Choose File no file selected

Upload

Figure C.33: Configure HTTPS

Enable Timeout (for Web Interface)

See Figure C.32. Check the box adjacent to “Enable Session Timeout” if you want the Option 34
to automatically log off of the web interface after a predetermined number of minutes. Minutes are
declared in the adjacent box, from minimum of 3 to a maximum of 1440.

Console Interface
See Figure C.32. Check the box adjacent to “Enable Session Timeout” if you want the Option
34 to automatically log off of the SSH Console interface after a predetermined number of minutes.
Minutes are declared in the adjacent box, from a minimum of 3 to a maximum of 1440.

Respond to Ping Requests

See Figure C.32. Check the box next to “Respond to Ping Requests” if you want the Option 34 to
respond to ping requests. Leave it unchecked if you do not want the Option 34 to respond to ping
requests.

Time Zone Setting

See Figure C.32. Values placed in this box are based on the POSIX format specification, and
determine the time zone offset from UTC, including any Daylight Saving Time offsets. In this
example, PST8 means Pacific Standard Time, which is 8 hours earlier than UTC. PDT7 means
that Pacific Daylight Time is 7 hours earlier than UTC. For additional information on regional
time offsets from UTC, see Section C.22.7. Note that the clock time indicated when selecting the
Clock tab is the local time of the Option 34.
210 Options List

System Configure Password

To configure the system password follow these instructions. From Figure C.32, select the Password
tab. Figure C.34 shows where to configure the System password. In the System page, click the
Password tab and fill in the current and new password. Click the Apply button. Password char-
acters must be from ASCII 33 to ASCII 126, and passwords may be from 1 to 16 characters in
length. Remember to write down any new password and keep it in a safe place.

Current Password
New Password
Confirm New Password

Apply Reset

Figure C.34: Configure System Password

System Update
Update packages may include uploading more than one file to the Option 34. Make sure to follow the
instructions included with the update packages, and follow these instructions. From Figure C.32,
select the Update tab and click the Choose File button shown in Figure C.35. This should open
your file browser in which you should be able to locate the file package obtained from Arbiter
Systems. Click the Update button and the file should load to the Option 34. After uploading the
package the Option 34 must be rebooted for the changes to take effect. Make sure that the computer
and clock do not lose power during the upload process.

Upload Package File

Choose File no file selected

Upload Reset

Figure C.35: Update System Firmware Package

C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 211

System Reboot
To reboot the Option 34 follow these instructions. From Figure C.32 select the Reboot tab. Fig-
ure C.36 shows only one button to click to reboot the system. Be aware that rebooting the system
will disconnect all active network sessions with the Option 34.

WARNING:
Rebooting the system will disconnect all
active sessions (including this one).

Reboot

Figure C.36: Rebooting the System

Network Settings and Information

To view the network status of your Option 34 follow these instructions. Select the Network item on
the left side of the web interface. Figure C.37 displays network status for both Ethernet Port 1 and
Port 2. This includes the IP addresses, MAC addresses and some standard data traffic statistics.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure

PTP
Ethernet Port 1
SNMP
IP Address [Link]
Clock MAC Address [Link]
Network
Bytes Packets Errors Dropped
System Rx 746214455 9503596 20 34534
Support Tx 98631446 1026146 11 0

Ethernet Port 1
Logout IP Address [Link]
MAC Address [Link]
Bytes Packets Errors Dropped
Rx 0 0 0 0
Tx 1692476 24730 3 0

Figure C.37: Checking Network Status

212 Options List

Configure Network Settings

To configure the network settings of your Option 34 follow these instructions. Figure C.38 illustrates
the configurable network functions on Option 34. Notice that the Ethernet Port 1 Mode is selected
as DHCP and Ethernet Port 2 Mode is selected as Static. When selecting Static, the additional
settings (i.e. Address, Netmask and Gateway) will appear.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure

PTP
Ethernet Port 1
SNMP
MAC Address [Link]
Clock Mode DHCP Static
Network Enable VLAN
System
Ethernet Port 2
Support
MAC Address [Link]
Mode DHCP Static
Address [Link]
Logout Netmask [Link]
Gateway
Enable VLAN

Apply Reset

Figure C.38: Configure Network Settings

Configure VLAN
To configure VLAN network settings, follow these instructions. Check the box to the left of Enable
VLAN to open these settings as seen in Figure C.39. Settings include an integer ID number, and
priority value from 0 to 7 seen in the drop down box. VLAN ID (VID) values range from 0 to 4095.

Enable VLAN
VLAN ID 0

VLAN Priority 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Figure C.39: Configure VLAN Network Settings

C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 213

GPS Status and Time Quality

This web interface page displays basic GPS satellite information and time quality. Select this page
to view Time Quality, Satellite information and Leap Seconds accumulated and pending, as shown
in Figure C.40.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP
PTP 02 May 2013 [Link] PDT
SNMP
Time Quality Locked
Clock
Satellites Tracked 10
Network Satellites Visible 10
System Leap Seconds
Support Current GPS-UTC Offset +16
Status Not Pending
Logout

Figure C.40: View Operation

SNMP Status
View this web interface page to check the SNMP status as illustrated in Figure C.41. For additional
detail on SNMP in the Model 1088A/B, see SNMP Support in Section C.22.5.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure

PTP SNMP Service Enabled (Running)
SNMP SNMP Traps Enabled
Clock
Network
System
Support

Logout

Figure C.41: View SNMP Operation

214 Options List

Configure SNMP
Follow these instructions to configure SNMP operation in the Option 34. Figure C.42 illustrates
the different selections for enabling the service and selecting traps (notifications). For definitions
of SNMP “Configure” selections, see Section C.22.5.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure

PTP Enable SNMP Service
SNMP Enable SNMP Traps
Clock System Start
Network System Stop
System Admin Login
Support Admin Logout
System Time Quality
System Time Set
System Time Change
Logout
Zero Satellites Visible
NTP Application Start
NTP Application Stop
PTP Application Start
PTP Application Stop
SNMP Application Start
SNMP Application Stop
Trap Receivers
IP Address 1 [Link]
IP Address 2
IP Address 3

Apply Reset

Figure C.42: SNMP Configuration Page

Checking the box enables the specific item; unchecking disables the specific item in the SNMP
Configure page. For example, checking the “Enable SNMP Service” turns ON the service. Enabling
SNMP Traps and checking specific SNMP traps (or notifications) will not send any notification
unless a Trap Receiver is specified by an IP address. Make sure to click the Apply button or the
changes will be lost.
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 215

PTP Status Page

To view the PTP service, select PTP tab on the left and the Status tab above. “+35” is the
Current UTC/PTP Offset in seconds. Note that PTP time is referenced to International Atomic
Time (TAI, from the French name Temps atomique international ). The time offset may change
from time to time when leap seconds are added. Figure C.43 illustrates the status of PTP.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure

PTP PTP Service Enabled (Running)
SNMP Current UTC-PTP Offset +35
Clock
Network
System
Support

Logout

Figure C.43: PTP Status Page

216 Options List

PTP Configuration
To configure PTP follow these instructions. Figure C.44 illustrates the PTP configuration page.
Choices for the Delay Mechanism include either P2P (Peer to Peer) or E2E (End to End). Protocol
choices include UDP IPv4, UDP IPv6 or Layer 2. Figure C.44 shows the Advanced settings, which
can be hidden using the Hide Advanced button.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure

PTP
Enable PTP Service
SNMP
Domain Number 0
Clock
Announce Interval 2
Network
Sync Interval 2
System
Min Delay Request 2
Support
Min Peer Delay Request 2

Announce Receipt Timeout 3

Delay Mechanism PTP

Logout
Protocol UDP IPv4

Hide Advanced...
Clock Class 6

Clock Accuracy 20

Priority 1 10

Priority 2 128

Enable Power Profile

Organization Sub Type 2

Grandmaster ID 10

Grandmaster Time Inaccuracy 40 nano seconds

Network Time Inaccuracy 40 nano seconds
Alternate Time Offset
Key 5

Current Offset 2 seconds

Jump Seconds 2 seconds
Next Jump Time 2 seconds
Display Name PowerPro2

Apply Reset

Figure C.44: PTP Configuration Page

C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 217

PTP Terms

• Domain: a collection of one or more PTP subdomains. A subdomain is a logical grouping

of 1588 clocks that synchronize to each other using the PTP protocol, but that are not
necessarily synchronized to PTP clocks in another PTP subdomain. Subdomains provide
a way of implementing disjoint sets of clocks, sharing a common network, but maintaining
independent synchronization within each set.
• Announce interval: specifies the time for sending announce messages. The range is from 0 to
4 seconds; the default is 2 seconds.
• Sync interval: the time for sending synchronization messages. The range is from -1 to 1
seconds; the default is 1 second.
• Delay request interval: specifies the time recommended to the member devices to send delay
request messages when the port is in the master state. The range is -1 second to 6 seconds.
The default is 5 (32 seconds).
• Peer Delay Request: allows the requesting device to calculate the propagation delay for the
individual segment.
• Announce receipt timeout: specifies the number of seconds the announce interval has to
pass without receipt of an Announce message before the occurrence of the event, AN-
NOUNCE RECEIPT TIMEOUT EXPIRE.
• Delay mechanism: communication delay, end to end or peer to peer.
• Protocol: UDP IPv4, UDP IPv6 or Layer2.
• Clock class value: used to advertise the quality level of the clock. A GPS clock is given the
value of 6.
• Clock accuracy: 22 is used for clock accuracy to within 250 ns.
• Priority 1: used in the execution of the best master clock algorithm.
• Priority 2: used in the execution of the best master clock algorithm.
218 Options List

NTP Status Page

To view the NTP service, select NTP tab on the left and the Status tab above. Figure C.45
illustrates the status of NTP.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure Authentication

PTP NTP Running
SNMP Root Dispersion 0.420
Clock Offset -0.063
Network Frequency 1.337
System System Jitter 0.009
Support Clock Jitter 0.008
Clock wander 0.001
Stratum 1
Logout

Figure C.45: NTP Status Page

NTP Terms

• NTP: either running or stopped.

• Root Dispersion: (or dispersion) represents the maximum error of the local clock relative to
the reference clock.
• Offset: (or clock offset) represents the amount to adjust the local clock to bring it into
correspondence with the reference clock.
• Frequency: frequency offset (PPM) relative to hardware clock.
• System Jitter (psi): is defined as the root-mean-square (RMS) average of the most recent
offset differences, and it represents the nominal error in estimating the offset (of the system).
• Clock Jitter: is defined as the root-mean-square (RMS) average of the most recent offset
differences, and it represents the nominal error in estimating the offset (of the clock).
• Clock wander: is the RMS of exponentially weighted frequency differences. This is not used
directly, but can, along with the jitter, be a highly useful monitoring and debugging tool.
• Stratum: the level of each server in the hierarchy is defined by a stratum number. Primary
servers are assigned stratum one.
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 219

NTP Configure
To configure NTP follow these instructions. Figure C.46 illustrates the NTP configuration page.
Choices for the NTP Version include Versions 1, 2, 3 and 4. Multicast and Broadcast addresses
may be typed in the assigned boxes.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure Authentication

PTP
NTP Version 4
SNMP
Clock
Multicast Address
Network
System
Broadcast Address
Support
Ethernet Port 1
Ethernet Port 2

Logout

Apply Reset

Figure C.46: NTP Configure Page

220 Options List

NTP Authentication

Authentication involves advanced configuration for NTP, and used to prevent tampering with the
timestamps on the logs generated by devices. You can configure a device to authenticate the time
sources to which the local clock is synchronized. When you enable NTP authentication, the device
synchronizes to a time source only if the source carries one of the authentication keys specified by
the ntp trusted-key command. The device drops any packets that fail the authentication check and
prevents them from updating the local clock. NTP authentication is disabled by default.

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Status Configure Authentication

PTP Enable Authentication
SNMP
Key Table
Clock
ID Format Key Trusted
Network
M
System
M
Support
M

Logout M

Apply Reset

Figure C.47: NTP Authentication Page

There are four authentication formats (S, N, A, M) with different rules for each of the keys. For
example, a type M format (MD5) allows the key to have up to 31 ASCII characters like a password.
The key ID is an integer and identifies the NTP server key. If authentication is enabled, the client
will only synchronize with the server if it is trusted. Therefore, you must select the “Trusted” check
box on the authentication page.

Option 34 Support Pages

Use this page, with Figure C.48, to contact Arbiter Systems and for version support.
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 221

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Contact Version Upldate Log

PTP
SNMP Arbiter Systems, Inc.
Clock 1324 Vendels Circle, Suite 121
Paso Robles, CA 93446
Network
System 805-237-3831
Support 800-321-3831 (US, Canada, Mexico only)
Mon-Thu 7:00am - 5:30pm Pacific Time

[Link]
Logout techsupport@[Link]

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Contact Version

PTP
Web Management
SNMP Core 1.4
Clock Modules
Network Option 34/35 1.4
Auth01 1.4
System Option 34/35 Data Server 1.4
Support Firmware / Hardware
Option 34 2.0
Startup App 1.1
System Monitor 1.1
Logout CLOI 1.2
Arbiter 1201 07 May 2013
Board (01-462) 01-E-1244012

Option 34 Network Time Module

NTP Contact Version Update Log

PTP
TPS-2.07 Mon May 4 [Link] PDT 2015
SNMP cloi-1.04 Wed May 20 [Link] PDT 2015
Clock
Network
System
Support

Logout

Figure C.48: Contact and Version Information Pages

222 Options List

C.22.4 SSH Console Interface

These instructions cover the setup and maintenance of the 1088A/B using the Secure Shell (SSH)
Console Interface. Secure Shell is an alternative to using the Telnet protocol, and used for securely
gaining access to a remote system like the optional Option 34. Configure all settings through one
of the Ethernet ports. Instructions on using the Web Interface for the same purpose are found in
Section C.22.3.
Any Secure Shell (SSH) client, like OpenSSH or PuTTYTM , is suggested. Make sure to select
SSH and type in the device’s IP address and connect. For Mac users, Terminal works fine. At the
command prompt (B is the command prompt) type: Bssh clockoption@host where host is
either the hostname (if served by your DNS server) or the IP address.
Press ENTER after typing the IP address. Shortly, you should be prompted for the password.
Type in the password and press ENTER. The console interface should open and appear similar to
Figure C.49.

Startup Page: System Status

When logging in to the Option 34 using SSH console the opening screen should be the System
Status information page. This provides an overview of the operation of the Option 34. Figure C.49
illustrates the opening page.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP Status| [Configure] | Password | Update | Reboot

PTP
SNMP System Time : [Link] 04/19/2011
Clock System Time Offset : -114us
Network Time Quality : Locked
[System] NTP : Running
Support PTP : Enabled (Running)
SNMP : Enabled (Running)
SNMP Traps : Enabled
Logout Temperature : 33.3C

Figure C.49: SSH Console Interface: Startup Screen

If you do not know the IP address of the port you are connected to, press the SYSTEM key
on the front panel several times until you reach OPTION STATUS and press the ENTER. Press the
UP or DOWN keys to scroll through the Option 34 pages. Messages should appear separately for
NET1 (port 1) and for NET2 (port 2). If the IP addresses do not appear, then check to make sure
a network cable is connected between the chosen port and an active network. If there is no DHCP
server on the network, a port set for DHCP will not display. Factory default settings include Port
1 set with a static IP address – [Link]. Make sure that the Link LED is lit.
IP addresses for all Ethernet ports of the installed Option 34 are either set automatically by the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on your network, or set to a static address.
The front panel will indicate the IP address of each port, if there is a connected cable.
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 223

Useful Keys for Console Navigation

Arrow Keys – navigate up, down, left, and right

Enter – accept the current selection
SPACE – accept the current selection except in edit fields (same as Enter)
Tab – cancel an edit/change
Q or q – select the Logout menu item
Use the cursor keys to navigate the console elements.

System Configure Page

Figure C.50 illustrates the System configuration page for the Option 34. It includes configuring for
HTTP or HTTPS (see next section), enabling session time outs for the web interface and console,
responding to ping requests and setting your time zone. Time zone setting only changes the time
under “Clock” in the web interface. Just as the receiving device must convert the NTP/PTP time
as it arrives at the device to local time zone, so the clock can display local time.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP Status| [Configure] | Password | Update | Reboot

PTP
SNMP Web Interface
( )HTTP (*)HTTPS Port[443 ]
Clock
PEM File Download Replace
Network
[System] [ ] Enable Session Timeout
Support
Console Interface
[ ] Enable Session Timeout
Logout
Miscellaneous
[X] Respond to Ping Requests
Time Zone Setting [PST8PDT7]

Apply Reset

Figure C.50: System Configure Page Using SSH

Configure HTTPS Page

To configure the HTTPS page you must use the Web Interface. For more information see Sec-
tion C.22.3.

Time Zone Setting

Values placed in this box determine the time zone offset from UTC. In this example, PST8 means
Pacific Standard Time, which is 8 hours earlier than UTC. PDT7 means that Pacific Daylight Time
is 7 hours earlier than UTC. For additional information on regional offsets, see Section C.22.7.
224 Options List

Configure Session Timeouts

From the System Configure page, use the cursor keys to navigate to the specific timeout feature
(either Web Interface or Console Interface) and press ENTER to select. Press ENTER again to
deselect.

Configure Password
Using the cursor keys navigate to the System Password page (Figure C.51). In the System/Password
page, fill in the old and new password. Remember to write down any new password and keep it in
a safe place. Passwords may consist of any ASCII character between 33 and 126, and be from 1 to
16 characters. Spaces are not allowed (ASCII 32), and there are no other requirements.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP Status| Configure | [Password] | Update | Reboot

PTP
SNMP Current Password [ ]
Clock New Password [ ]
Network Confirm New Password [ ]
[System]
Support Apply Reset

Logout

Figure C.51: Configure System Password Using SSH

System Update
Use the Web Interface to perform any update. For more information, see Section C.22.3.

System Reboot
Use the cursor keys to navigate to System Reboot, highlight Reboot and press ENTER. Select Yes
or No to confirm your choice and press ENTER again. After the system has rebooted, you will
need to log back on to the Option 34.
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 225

Network Settings and Information

To view the network status of your Option 34 using the SSH Console follow these instructions. Use
the cursor keys to navigate to Network Status (Figure C.52), which should display the network
status for both Ethernet ports, 1 and 2. This includes the IP addresses, MAC addresses and some
standard data traffic statistics.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP [Status] Configure

PTP
Ethernet Port 1
SNMP
IP Address [Link]
Clock Hardware Address [Link]
[Network] Bytes Packets Errors Dropped
System Rx 2649123 39782 0 110
Tx 1554398 11894 5 0
Support
Ethernet Port 2 (Not Active)
IP Address
Logout Hardware Address [Link]
Bytes Packets Errors Dropped
Rx 0 0 0 0
Tx 0 0 0 0

Figure C.52: Checking Network Status Using SSH

226 Options List

Configure Network Settings

To configure the network settings of your Option 34 follow these instructions. Figure C.53 illustrates
the configurable network functions on the Option 34. Notice that the Ethernet Port 1 Mode is
selected as DHCP and Ethernet Port 2 Mode is selected as Static. When selecting Static, the
additional settings (i.e. Address, Netmask and Gateway) will appear as seen on Ethernet Port 2.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP Status [Configure]

PTP
Ethernet Port 1
SNMP
Hardware Address [Link]
Clock (*) DHCP ( ) Static
[Network] [ ] Enable VLAN
System
Ethernet Port 2
Support
Hardware Address [Link]
( ) DHCP (*) Static
IP Address [[Link] ]
Logout Netmask [[Link] ]
Gateway [ ]
[X] Enable VLAN
VLAN ID [123 ]
VLAN Priority [2]

Apply Reset

Figure C.53: Configure Network Settings Using SSH

Enable VLAN
From Figure C.53 notice that on Ethernet Port 2 that Enable VLAN is selected. When selected, the
two lines below Enable VLAN appear. These two lines disappear when Enable VLAN is deselected.
For VLAN ID, type in up to any four-digit integer. For VLAN Priority, type in any value between
0 and 7.
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 227

GPS Status and Time Quality

This web interface page displays basic GPS satellite information and time quality. Select this page
to view Time Quality, Satellite information and Leap Seconds accumulated and pending, as shown
in Figure C.54.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP
PTP
09 May 2013 [Link] PDT
SNMP
[Clock]
Network Time Quality : Locked
System Satellites Tracked : 10
Support Satellites Visible : 10
Leap Seconds
Current GPS-UTC Offset: 16
Status : Not pending
Logout

Figure C.54: View Operation Using SSH

SNMP Status

Use the cursor keys to select SNMP, then Status and press ENTER to view the SNMP status as
illustrated in Figure C.55.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP [Status] Configure

PTP
SNMP SNMP Service : Enabled (Running)
Clock SNMP Traps : Enabled
Network
[System]
Support

Logout

Figure C.55: View SNMP Operation Using SSH

Configure SNMP

Please use the Web Interface to configure SNMP. See Section C.22.3 for more instructions.

PTP Status Page

To view the PTP service, select PTP tab on the left and the Status tab above. Figure C.56
illustrates the status of PTP.
228 Options List

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP [Status] Configure

[PTP]
SNMP PTP Service : Enabled (Running)
Clock Current UTC-PTP Offset : +35
Network
System
Support

Logout

Figure C.56: PTP Status Page Using SSH

Configure PTP Service

Please use the Web Interface to configure PTP. See Section C.22.3 for more information.

NTP Status Page

Use the cursor keys to select NTP, then Status and press ENTER. Figure C.57 illustrates the status
page for NTP.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

[NTP] [Status] Configure

PTP
SNMP NTP : Enabled (Running)
Clock Root Dispersion : 0.451
Network Offset : 0.095
System Frequency : 8.623
Support System Jitter : 0.008
Click Jitter : 0.010
Clock Wander : 0.001
Logout Stratum : 1

Figure C.57: NTP Status Page Using SSH

C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 229

NTP Terms
• NTP: reveals that it is either running or stopped.
• Root Dispersion: (or dispersion) represents the maximum error of the local clock relative
to the reference clock.
• Offset: (or clock offset) represents the amount to adjust the local clock to bring it into
correspondence with the reference clock.
• Frequency: frequency offset (PPM) relative to hardware clock.
• System Jitter: is defined as the root-mean-square (RMS) average of the most recent offset
differences, and it represents the nominal error in estimating the offset (of the system).
• Clock Jitter: is defined as the root-mean-square (RMS) average of the most recent offset
differences, and it represents the nominal error in estimating the offset (of the clock).
• Clock wander: is the RMS of exponentially weighted frequency differences. This is not used
directly, but can, along with the jitter, be a highly useful monitoring and debugging tool.
• Stratum: the level of each server in the hierarchy is defined by a stratum number. Primary
servers are assigned stratum one.

NTP Configure
To configure NTP follow these instructions. Use the cursor keys to select NTP, then Configure and
press ENTER. Figure C.58 illustrates the NTP configuration page. Choices for the NTP Version
include Versions 1, 2, 3 and 4. Multicast and Broadcast addresses may be typed in the assigned
boxes.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

[NTP] Status [ Configure ] Authentication

PTP
SNMP NTP Version [4]
Clock
Network Multicast Address [ ]
System
Support Broadcast Address
Ethernet Port 1 [ ]
Ethernet Port 2 [ ]
Logout
Apply Reset

Figure C.58: NTP Configure Page Using SSH

230 Options List

NTP Authentication
Authentication involves advanced configuration for NTP, and used to prevent tampering with the
timestamps on the logs generated by devices. You can configure a device to authenticate the time
sources to which the local clock is synchronized. When you enable NTP authentication, the device
synchronizes to a time source only if the source carries one of the authentication keys specified by
the ntp trusted-key command. The device drops any packets that fail the authentication check and
prevents them from updating the local clock. NTP authentication is disabled by default.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

[NTP] Status Configure [ Authentication ]

PTP
SNMP [X] Enable Authentication
Clock
Key Table
Network ID Format Key Trusted
System [ ] [M] [ ] [ ]
Support [ ] [M] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [M] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [M] [ ] [ ]
Logout [ ] [M] [ ] [ ]

Apply Reset

Figure C.59: NTP Authentication Page Using SSH

There are four authentication formats (S, N, A, M) with different rules for each of the keys. For
example, a type M format (MD5) allows the key to have up to 31 ASCII characters like a password.
The key ID is an integer and identifies the NTP server key. If authentication is enabled, the client
will only synchronize with the server if it is trusted. Therefore, you must select the ”Trusted” check
box on the authentication page.
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 231

Option 34 Support Pages

Use this page, with Figure C.60, to contact Arbiter Systems and for version support.

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS

NTP [ Contact ] Version

PTP
SNMP Arbiter Systems, Inc.
1324 Vendels Circle, Suite 121
Clock
Paso Robles, CA 93446
Network
System 800-321-3831
[Support] 805-237-3831
Mon-Thu 7:00am-5:30pm Pacific Time

Logout [Link]
techsupport@[Link]

Computer Name (or IP address) – ssh – 80x24

ARBITER
Option 34 Network Time Module SYSTEMS
Contact [ Version ]
NTP
PTP Console UI
SNMP Core 1.4
Clock Modules:
Option 34/35 1.4
Network
Auth01 1.4
System Option 34/35 Data Server 1.4
[Support]
Firmware / Hardware
Option 34 2.1
Logout Startup App 1.1
System Monitor 1.1
CLOI 1.2
Arbiter 1084 07 May 2013
Board (01-462) 01-e-1244012

Figure C.60: Contact and Version Information Pages Using SSH

232 Options List

C.22.5 SNMP Support

This section reviews in some more detail SNMP on the Model 1088A/B. Simple Network Man-
agement Protocol (SNMP) was created to provide a standard for managing different networks and
the devices on the networks. As such, SNMP is designed to operate on the application layer using
different transport protocols (e.g. TCP/IP and UDP), making it independent of network hardware.
SNMP operates on this basis in the Model 1088A/B.
An SNMP managed network consists of three components: A managed device, an agent and a
network-management system (NMS). The 1088A/B is a managed device running an SNMP agent
that responds to queries from the network-management system.

SNMP Version Information

Currently, there are three versions of SNMP defined: SNMP v1, v2 and v3. The Model 1088A/B
supports these three versions. Here are some differences between versions.
SNMP v1. Basic Operations and Features

• GetUsed by the NMS to retrieve the value of one or more object instances from and agent.
• GetNextUsed by the NMS to retrieve the value of the next object instance in a table or a list
within an agent.
• SetUsed by the NMS to set the values of the object instances within an agent.
• TrapUsed by agents to asynchronously inform the NMS of a significant event.

SNMP v2. Additional Operations and Features

• GetBulkUsed by the NMS to efficiently retrieve large blocks of data.

• InformAllows one NMS to send trap information to another NMS and to then receive a
response.

SNMP v3. Security Enhancement

• User-based Security Model (USM) for SNMP message security.

• View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for access control.
• Dynamically configure the SNMP agents using SNMP SET commands.

Management Information Base (MIB) Table

Object names are stored in a (MIB) table that reside on a computer, and correspond to values
in a managed device (the 1088A/B). The agent in the Option 34 will respond to queries from the
management program to return values of these objects. Currently, management programs may only
read the status of the Model 1088A/B and not configure settings. See Section C.22.5 for a print
out of the current MIB table. To obtain a soft copy of the MIB table for the Model 1088A/B, you
may download it from the Arbiter Systems website at the following address: [Link].

SNMP Service
Descriptions that follow are based on the web interface. The SNMP service (agent) runs on the
Option 34 when enabled in the configuration. Figure C.41 illustrates the SNMP Status screen,
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 233

which shows that both the SNMP service and traps are enabled. To view the SNMP Status screen,
log in to the Option 34 with the web interface and select the SNMP tab on the left.
Note that SNMP configuration is available only through the web interface.

SNMP Traps
SNMP Traps (v1) or Notifications (v2) may be used to:

• send notification of a change

• signify a problem with the system
• notify that some needed system maintenance was performed
• notify that someone has logged on to the system

Traps, or notifications, are generally sent to an IP address of a computer running SNMP man-
agement software. The Option 34 can store up to three separate target IP addresses.

Enabling SNMP Service and Configuring SNMP Traps

To configure snmp, open your web browser and log in to the Option 34. Note: SNMP cannot be
configured using the SSH Console. Select “SNMP” on the left and “Configure” tab at the top.
Figure C.42 illustrates a list of selection boxes to configure your snmp service and traps. At the
bottom are three boxes for IP addresses designated as trap receivers, where trap messages may be
sent.

SNMP Configuration Reference

Listed below are the configurable options available for snmp traps. Trap events will only be sent
out if the Trap Receivers are selected and identified by a valid IP address.

• Enable SNMP Service: Select this item to make the snmp service active.

• Enable SNMP Traps: Select this item to make any snmp trap active.

1. Enable System Start: notifies when the “System” (i.e. Option 34) starts up.
2. Enable System Stop: notifies when the “System” (i.e. Option 34) stops.
3. Enable Admin Login: notifies when someone logs in to the Option 34.
4. Enable Admin Logout: notifies when someone logs out from the Option 34.
5. System Time Quality: notifies when the time quality changes.
6. System Time Set: notifies when the system locks to the GPS after being turned on.
7. System Time Change: notifies when the clock gets adjusted at some time after being
initially set.
8. Zero Satellites Visible: notifies when the clock loses lock.
9. NTP Application Start: notifies when NTP service starts.
10. NTP Application Stop: notifies when NTP service stops.
11. PTP Application Start: notifies when PTP service starts.
234 Options List

12. PTP Application Stops: notifies when PTP service stops.

13. SNMP Application Start: notifies when SNMP service starts.
14. SNMP Application Stop: notifies when SNMP service stops.

• Trap Receivers: Select this item to enable SNMP to send messages to snmp receivers.

1. IP Address 1: Type in the IP address of snmp receiver number 1.

2. IP Address 2: Type in the IP address of snmp receiver number 2.
3. IP Address 3: Type in the IP address of snmp receiver number 3.

MIB Table
The text of the MIB table, listed below, is current as of the publication date of this manual, and
is produced by Arbiter’s technical team. Updates are available by download from the Arbiter web
site. Also, the SNMP agent that runs on the the Option 34 is also available for download and
use in the Model 1088A/B. The MIB table is normally loaded in a MIB browser and the agent is
normally uploaded into the Option 34.
–
– ARBITER ALL MIB, Revision 0.0003, 3 DEC 2012
–
ARBITER-ALL-MIB DEFINITIONS ::= BEGIN
IMPORTS
MODULE-IDENTITY, OBJECT-TYPE, enterprises, Integer32, Unsigned32 FROM SNMPv2-SMI
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION, TruthValue FROM SNMPv2-TC
;
–
– The position within the OID hierarchy of this MIB:
–
arbiter OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { enterprises 39849 }
sys MODULE-IDENTITY
LAST-UPDATED “201205250000Z”
ORGANIZATION “Arbiter Systems”
CONTACT-INFO
“
Arbiter Systems, Inc.
Paso Robles, CA
Tel: +1 805 237 3831”
DESCRIPTION
“This MIB module defines a MIB which provides general information
about an Arbiter Systems’ product.”
::= { arbiter 1 }

device OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { sys 1 }

diag OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { sys 2 }
config OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { sys 3 }
GPS OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { sys 4 }
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 235

systrap OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { sys 5 }

ntp MODULE-IDENTITY
LAST-UPDATED “201205230000Z”
ORGANIZATION “Arbiter Systems”
CONTACT-INFO
“
Arbiter Systems, Inc.
Paso Robles, CA
Tel: +1 805 237 3831”
DESCRIPTION
“This MIB module defines a MIB which provides mechanisms to
monitor and control an NTP server.”
::= { arbiter 3 }

ntpsys OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { ntp 1 }

ntptrap OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { ntp 2 }

–
– Textual Conventions:
–

MilliUnits ::= TEXTUAL-CONVENTION

DISPLAY-HINT “d-3”
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “”
SYNTAX INTEGER

MicroUnits ::= TEXTUAL-CONVENTION

DISPLAY-HINT “d-6”
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “”
SYNTAX INTEGER

–
– General Device Information
–
sysDevLabel OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “String identifier for the General Information group.”
::= { device 1 }

sysDevProduct OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
236 Options List

MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The product family on which this agent is running.”
::= { device 2 }

sysDevModel OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { device 3 }

sysDevSerialNumber OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { device 4 }

version OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { device 5 }

sysDevVerLabel OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { version 1 }

sysDevVerCore OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { version 2 }

sysDevVerMonitor OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { version 3 }

sysDevVerCLOI OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 237

DESCRIPTION “The device model.”

::= { version 4 }

sysDevVerClock OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { version 5 }

sysDevVerNTP OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { version 6 }

sysDevVerPTP OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { version 7 }

sysDevVerSNMP OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { version 8 }

sysDevClockModel OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The device model.”
::= { device 6 }

sysDiagLabel OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “Diagnostic information.”
::= { diag 1 }

sysDiagTemp OBJECT-TYPE
238 Options List

SYNTAX MilliUnits
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The current temperature of the device.”
::= { diag 2 }

sysDiagTimeQuality OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “Clock time quality status.”
::= { diag 3 }

sysDiagNtpStatus OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “The operational status of NTP”
::= { diag 4 }

rec1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gps 1 }

gpsRec1Label OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “String identifier for receiver 1.”
::= { rec1 1 }

gpsRec1Type OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “Receiver 1 GPS system type.”
::= { rec1 2 }

gpsRec1SatsVisible OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX Integer32
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “Number of GPS Satellites visible to receiver 1”
::= { rec1 3 }

gpsRec1SatsTracked OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX Integer32
MAX-ACCESS read-only
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 239

STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “Number of GPS Satellites tracked by receiver 1”
::= { rec1 4 }

systrapPowerUp OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “System powering up”
::= { systrap 1 }

systrapShutDown OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “System shutting down”
::= { systrap 2 }

systrapAdminLogin OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “System administrative login”
::= { systrap 3 }

systrapAdminLogout OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “System administrative logout”
::= { systrap 4 }

systrapTimeQuality OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX INTEGER32
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “System time quality change”
::= { systrap 5 }

–
– NTP System Group
–
ntpSysString OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
240 Options List

DESCRIPTION “ String identifier for the NTP System Group.”

::= { ntpsys 1 }

ntpSysClock OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “the current local time. Local time is derived
from the hardware clock of the particular machine and
increments at intervals depending on the design used.”
::= { ntpsys 2 }

ntpSysClockDateTime OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “the current local time. Local time is derived
from the hardware clock of the particular machine and
increments at intervals depending on the design used.”
::= { ntpsys 3 }

ntpSysOffset OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX Integer32
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “”
::= { ntpsys 4 }

ntpSysFreq OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX MilliUnits
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “”
::= { ntpsys 5 }

ntpSysSysJitter OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX MilliUnits
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “”
::= { ntpsys 6 }

ntpSysClkJitter OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX MilliUnits
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 241

DESCRIPTION “”
::= { ntpsys 7 }

ntpSysClkWander OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX MilliUnits
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “”
::= { ntpsys 8 }

ntpSysRootDelay OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX MilliUnits
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “the total roundtrip delay to the primary
reference source at the root of the synchronization
subnet, in seconds”
::= { ntpsys 9 }

ntpSysRootDispersion OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX MilliUnits
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “ the maximum error relative to the primary
reference source at the root of the synchronization
subnet, in seconds. Only positive values greater
than zero are possible”
::= { ntpsys 10 }

ntpSysLeap OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX Integer32
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “ two-bit code warning of an impending leap
second to be inserted in the NTP timescale.”
::= { ntpsys 11 }

ntpSysStratum OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX Integer32 (0..255)
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “ indicating the stratum of the local clock.
0, unspecified
1, primary reference (e.g.,, calibrated atomic clock,
radio clock)
2-255, secondary reference (via NTP)”
242 Options List

::= { ntpsys 12 }

ntpSysPrecision OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX Integer32
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “signed integer indicating the precision
of the various clocks, in seconds to the nearest power
of two.”
::= { ntpsys 13 }

ntpSysRefTime OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS read-only
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “ the local time when the local clock was last
updated. If the local clock has neverbeen synchronized,
the value is zero.”
::= { ntpsys 14 }

ntptrapPowerUp OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “NTP server powering up”
::= { ntptrap 1 }

ntptrapShutDown OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “NTP server shutting down”
::= { ntptrap 2 }

ntptrapSynchronized OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “NTP server synchronized to GPS”
::= { ntptrap 3 }

ntptrapSynchronizationLost OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX OCTET STRING
MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION “NTP server GPS synchronized lost”
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 243

::= { ntptrap 4 }

END

NTP MIB Object Definitions

• ntpSysLeap: two-bit code warning of an impending leap second to be inserted in the NTP
timescale.

• ntpSysStratum: indicating the stratum of the local clock. 0, unspecified; 1, primary refer-
ence (e.g., calibrated atomic clock, radio clock); 2 to 255, secondary reference (via NTP).

• ntpSysPrecision: signed integer indicating the precision of the various clocks, in seconds to
the nearest power of two.

• ntpSysRootDelay: the total roundtrip delay to the primary reference source at the root of
the synchronization subnet, in seconds.

• tpSysRootDispersion: the maximum error relative to the primary reference source at the
root of the synchronization subnet, in seconds. Only positive values greater than zero are
possible.

• ntpSysRefId: the particular reference clock. In the case of stratum 0 (unspecified) or

stratum 1 (primary reference source), this is a pour-octet, left-justified, zero-padded ASCII
string. In the case of stratum 2 and greater (secondary reference) this is the four-octet Internet
address of the peer selected for synchronization.

• ntpSysRefTime: the local time when the local clock was last updated. If the local clock as
never been synchronized, the value is zero.

• ntpSysPoll: the minimum interval between transmitted messages, in seconds as a power of

two. For instance, a value of six indicates a minimum interval of 64 seconds.

• ntpSysPeer: the current synchronization source. Usually this will be a pointer to a structure
containing the peer variables. The special value NULL indicates there is no currently valid
synchronization source.

• ntpSysPhase: The system clock offset per selected source. (needs verification)

• ntpSysFreq: The system clock frequency correction per ntpd. (needs verification)

• ntpSysError: The current system error per ntpd? (needs verification)

• ntpSysClock: the current local time. Local time is derived from the hardware clock of the
particular machine and increments at intervals depending on the design used.

• ntpSysSystem: the type of local Operating System.

• ntpSysProcessor: the type of the local Processor.

244 Options List

C.22.6 Option 34 Specifications

Performance
NTP: < 100 microseconds, depending on network load and clock accuracy
PTP: < 100 microseconds (software)
< 1 microsecond with hardware assist

Interface
Network Two Ethernet (Version 2.0/IEEE 802.3)
10/100BT or multimode SSF modules
Protocols NTP, SNTP, PTP (IEEE 1588TM -2008), UDP, ICMP, SNMP, TCP, SSH,
SCP, SSL, HTTP, HTTPS.

Operator Interface
Management Web and SSH Console
Status LEDs Sync (green)
Fault (red)
Link (green – 10baseT, yellow – 100baseT)
Setup IP number (DHCP or Static)
Net Mask
Reference Identifier
UDP Broadcast parameters
MD5 and DES authentication keys are optional
C.22 Option 34: NTP/PTP Server 245

C.22.7 Time Zone Format Strings

Table C.17 lists some common time zone strings as discussed on page 209. These strings are meant
to be installed in the Option 34 to configure the local time indicated as in the Web Interface, Clock
screen. Values in this table are constructed and formatted according to the POSIX system. For
further information regarding this time zone formatting system, please go to the following link:
[Link]

Some Useful Time Zone Values

“Greenwich Mean Time” GMT0 “Turkmenistan Standard Time” TMT-5

“Universal Coordinated Time” UTC0 “Guam Standard Time” GST-10
“Fernando De Noronha Std” FST2FDT “Eastern Australian Standard” EAS-10EAD
“Brazil Standard Time” BST3 “Central Australian Standard” CAS-9:30CAD
“Eastern Standard (Brazil)” EST3EDT “Japan Standard Time” JST-9
“Greenland Standard Time” GST3 “Korean Standard Time” KST-9KDT
“Newfoundland Standard Time” NST3:30NDT “China Coast Time” CCT-8
“Atlantic Standard Time” AST4ADT “Hong Kong Time” HKT-8
“Western Standard (Brazil)” WST4WDT “Singapore Standard Time” SST-8
“Eastern Standard Time” EST5EDT “Western Australian Standard” WAS-8WAD
“Chile Standard Time” CST5CDT “Java Standard Time” JST-7:30
“Acre Standard Time” AST5ADT “North Sumatra Time” NST-7
“Cuba Standard Time” CST5CDT “Indian Standard Time” IST-5:30
“Central Standard Time” CST6CDT “Iran Standard Time” IST-3:30IDT
“Easter Island Standard” EST6EDT “Moscow Standard Time” MSK-4
“Mountain Standard Time” MST7MDT “Eastern Europe Time” EET-2
“Pacific Standard Time” PST8PDT “Israel Standard Time” IST-2IDT
“Alaska Standard Time” AKS9AKD “Middle European Time” MEZ-1MES
“Yukon Standard Time” YST9YST “Swedish Winter Time” SWT-1SST
“Hawaii Standard Time” HST10HDT “French Winter Time” FWT-1FST
“Somoa Standard Time” SST11 “Central European Time” CET-1CES
“New Zealand Standard Time” NZS-12NZD “West African Time” WAT-1

Table C.17: Partial List of POSIX Time Zone Strings

246 Options List

C.23 Option 36: Four Configurable Outputs

C.23.1 General Description
Option 36 adds four rear-panel outputs, which may be configured to any available signal in the
1088A/B series clocks. The configuration of the four outputs can be changed at any time via
internal jumper settings.

C.23.2 Specifications
General

Output Connectors: BNC-type RF connectors (4).

Analog Outputs

Output Type Operational amplifier (LF353) output, with 557-ohm series resistor.
Available Outputs: Modulated IRIG-B and ±5 V deviation.
Signal characteristics: IRIG-B time code, modulated onto 1 kHz 10 Vpp sine wave carrier.
Deviation (1088A/B): ±5 volts analog, corresponding to 1-PPS deviation channel A or B
(see individual clock Operation Manual). The proportion is 1 V per
10-µs deviation (±50 µs full scale).

Digital Outputs

Output Type: High-Speed CMOS (74HC126), 0 to 5 volts, with 47 ohm

series resistance.
Available Outputs: Note: All outputs available on Model 1088B.
IRIG-B: IRIG format B time code (unmodulated).

C.23.3 Changing Outputs via Internal Settings

Case Removal

To change the configuration of Option 36, the top cover of the instrument must be removed. Turn
off the instrument, and disconnect the power cord. Using a T-25 Torx driver, remove the four
screws holding the cover (and rack mount ears, if used) in place, and lift the cover off.
WARNING Do not remove the top cover while power is applied. Hazardous voltages are present
while the power cord is connected. Always disconnect the unit from the input power source before
removal of the top cover.
C.23 Option 36: Four Configurable Outputs 247

General Information
Option 36 incorporates a flexible output selection system using jumpers on the Option 36 printed
circuit board. Each of the four rear-panel BNC-type I/O connectors, included with Option 36, can
be configured to perform any of the available output functions. Figure C.61 shows the locations
and Table C.18 indicates the functions for all of the jumpers on the Option 36 board.

Function Selection
Jumpers JMP1, JMP2, JMP3 and JMP4 control which output signal arrives at a respective output
connector.
Desired Output Connector Function Jumper
J2 JMP1
J3 JMP2
J4 JMP3
J5 JMP4
Compare each jumper position with the items in Table C.18 to match your desired signal type.
For example, to provide unmodulated IRIG-B at output connector J2, set JMP1 jumper pin to
position 3. If all of the four outputs need to be set to provide unmodulated IRIG-B, place each
function jumper to position 3.

Mode Selection
Jumpers JMP9, JMP10, JMP11, JMP12 control the signal driver for each output: analog or digital.
Make sure to select these output mode jumpers for each output. For each output, position A selects
a digital driver and position B selects an analog driver. The table below indicates the correct jumper
for each output.
Desired Output Connector Mode Jumper
J2 JMP9
J3 JMP10
J4 JMP11
J5 JMP12
On the 1088A/B two signals are defined as analog: modulated IRIG-B and ±5 V deviation. On
all Mode jumpers, JMP9 – JMP12, analog signals use position B. Digital signals, like unmodulated
IRIG-B, use position A.

Clock Model Selection

Jumpers JMP13 and JMP14 select the clock model in which Option 36 is mounted. JMP13 selects
for Model 1088B and JMP14 selects for Model 1084A/B/C, Model 1093A/B/C and Model 1201B/C.
Make sure to to set this jumper to JMP13 or Option 36 will not operate correctly in the Model
1088A/B.
248 Options List

J2

B
A

JMP9
JMP13
J1
Assembly Number LB0050300 Rev.__

JMP14
JMP1
Arbiter Systems, Inc.

J3

B
A

JMP10 JMP11
22
21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

JMP2

B
A

22
21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

J4

JMP3 JMP4
22
21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

B
A

JMP12
J5
22
21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

Figure C.61: Option 36 Jumper Configuration

If IRIG-B is chosen as the output signal, then each selected output should produce a waveform
very similar to one of the drawings in Figure C.62 below.

ON-TIME 1 PPS
Start of next
second in
time code
UNMODULATED
IRIG
B003
B004 REFERENCE REFERENCE IRIG ZERO IRIG ONE

MODULATED

IRIG
B123
B124

Figure C.62: IRIG-B Waveforms and 1 Pulse Per Second

C.23 Option 36: Four Configurable Outputs 249

Output Signal Function Select Jumper Mode Select Jumper

IRIG-B Modulated 1 B
Deviation 2 B
IRIG-B Unmodulated 3 A
IRIG-E 4 A
IRIG-H 5 A
10 MPPS 6 A
5 MPPS 7 A
1 MPPS 8 A
100 kPPS 9 A
10 kPPS 10 A
1 kPPS 11 A
100 PPS 12 A
60 PPS 13 A
50 PPS 14 A
10 PPS 15 A
IRIG-D/1 PPM 16 A
1 PPM 17 A
1 PPS 18 A
Programmable Pulse 19 A
Out of Lock 20 A
IRIG-B Mod. Manch. 21 A
No Connection 22 A

Table C.18: Option 36 Output Connector Jumper Settings

NOTE: If any of the jumpers were changed, replace the cover to the chassis before returning to
service.
250 Options List
Appendix D

CE Mark Certification

D.1 Introduction
On the following pages contain the individual CE Mark Certifications for models covered in this
manual. This includes Model 1088B.
252 CE Mark Certification

Declaration of Conformity with European Union Directives

Date of Issue: June 30, 2003

Directives: 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility

73/23/ EEC Low Voltage Safety

Model Number(s): 1088B GPS Satellite-Controlled Clock

Manufacturer: Arbiter Systems, Inc.

1324 Vendels Circle, Suite 121
Paso Robles, CA 93446 − USA

Harmonized EN55011 Class A, Radiated and Conducted Emissions

Standard EN50082-1 Generic Immunity, Part 1
Referenced: Residential, Commercial and Light Industrial Environments
EN61010-1 Safety requirements of Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory Use.

Signed:

Signatory: Bruce H. Roeder

This certificate declares that the described equipment conforms to the applicable requirements of
the directives on Electromagnetic Compatibility 89/339/EEC, Safety 73/23/EEC, and amendments
by 93/68/EEC adopted by the European Union.
Appendix E

Statement of Compliance

E.1 Introduction
The following page is a statement of compliance that includes Model 1088B.
254 Statement of Compliance

G.P.S. Satellite Clock Statement of Compliance

February 5, 2008

TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:

All Arbiter Systems, Incorporated G.P.S. Satellite Controlled Clocks are Primary Standards.
They provide time traceable to U.T.C. and U.S.N.O. within published accuracy specifications
anywhere in the world. All Arbiter Systems Incorporated G.P.S. Satellite Controlled Clocks also
carry a limited lifetime warranty, which is based on in field MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)
of over one million (1,000,000) hours. These products are available with all known time
synchronization signals presently in use world wide by the electric power industry.
Arbiter Systems does not supply a type test certificate as requested for G.P.S. systems as the
accuracy is a function of the G.P.S. system and not of the receiver. However we (Arbiter) hereby
certify that this equipment conforms to all Arbiter Systems Incorporated specifications for
material and process. All Arbiter Systems calibration products are supplied with a type test
certificate guaranteeing traceability to National Standards, but are inappropriate for G.P.S.
clocks, which are Primary Standards by definition.

Regards,

Bruce H. Roeder
International Marketing Manager
Arbiter Systems, Inc.
BHR/sc
Index

1-PPS distance, 61
description, 60 physical protection, 24
timing output, 61
accessories user-supplied, 25
antenna & cable, 24 wire losses, 63
included, 1 CE Compliance Notice, 251
altitude, see elevation display CE mark certifications, 251
amplifier comm ports, 69
antenna cable, 24 command key
analog drivers, 58 definitions, 7
antenna configure
clock connection, 25 begin, 33
connection, 19, 25
firmware setup, 33
installation, 19
settings
mounting assembly, 20
auto survey, 53
mounting kit, 19, 20
back light, 40
mounting procedure, 20
broadcast, 36
power supplied to, 25
daylight saving time, 38
resistance, 22
event/deviation, 50
user-supplied cables, 25
irig time data, 49
voltage, 22
local hour, 37
antenna & cable testing, 22
option control, 55
antenna cable
out of lock, 39
attenuation, 23
port parameters, 36
DC resistance, 24
programmable pulse, 42
delay, 23
RS-232, 35
details, 23
effects of cable parameters, 23 system delays, 41
Appendix connecting
A, 99 modulated IRIG-B, 62
B, 105 NTP/PTP, 202
C, 109 outputs, 61
D, 251 unmodulated IRIG-B, 62
E, 253 connecting power to the clock, see inlet power
connector
cable antenna, 10, 19
accessory, 24 event input, 10
adjacent signal interference, 25 ntp/ptp, 202
delays, 64 power inlet, 9
256 INDEX

relay contacts, 11 making changes, 207

serial communications, 10 IRIG-B
timing output, 11 IEEE 1344 description, 60
contact information, ii initial indication, 96
copyright, v modulated
cordsets voltage matching, 63
IED-320 power inlet connector, 14 timecode description, 59
crimp tool unmodulated, 60
RG-11, 24 waveform comparison, 60
IRIG-B Time code types, 59
digital drivers, 58 issuance, ii
display
startup, 94 keys
display modes description, 7
Position, 98 Down, 8
Time, 96 Enter, 8
drive current vs. output voltage, 59 Event/Deviation, 8
driver Position, 8
analog, 58 Setup, 8
digital, 58 Status, 8
Time, 8
elevation display, 98 Up, 8
event display indication, 95
event trapping, 68 latitude display, 98
arming, 68 LCD
display, 7
fault indication LED
serial port, 72 annunciator
fault modes, 96 definitions, 6
firmware status indicators, 6
updates, ii longitude display, 98
front panel drawing, see panel drawing, front
fuses mounting kit
replacing, 17 antenna, 19
types and location, 16
NTP Server, 195
gps NTP/PTP Server, 202
surge arrester, 22, 105 numeric data entry mode, 34

handling Option
precautions, 1 07, terminals, 9
08, terminals with SWC, 9
IEC-320 connector, 9 15A, terminals with SWC, 9
initial clock time, 93 15B, terminals with SWC, 10
initial LED indication, 93 power, 07, 14–16
initial startup sequence, 93 power, 08, 15
inlet power, 13 Options List
ip address Option 01, Backlight, 110
INDEX 257

Option 02, Battery Backup, 111 serial command

Option 03, Four Additional Outputs, 112 antenna delay
Option 07, IEC-320 Power Inlet, 127 set, 89
Option 08, 10 − 60 Vdc Power Inlet, 128 arm event trigger, 76
Option 15A/B, 110–170/110–300 Vdc Power backlight auto, 81
Inlet, 134 backlight off, 81
Option 19, Fault Relay, 161 backlight on, 81
Option 20A, Four Fiber Optic Outputs, 165 broadcast ASCII + Quality, 73
Option 23, COMTRADE Sample Rate Gen- broadcast ASCII Std, 71
erator, 168 broadcast Event Data, 71
Option 27, 8-Channel High Drive, 175 broadcast Extended ASCII, 73
Option 28, Power System Time, Frequency broadcast NMEA183 GLL, 74
and Phase Monitor, 180 broadcast NMEA183 ZDA, 75
Option 29, Four Outputs, Dry Contacts, 190 broadcast Status, 72
Option 32/33, NTP Server, 195 broadcast strings, 71
Option 34, NTP/PTP Server, 202 broadcast Vorne Std, 71
Option 36, Four Configurable Outputs, 246 broadcast Year + ASCII, 74
output signal broadcast, interrogate, 71
description, 59 clear event buffer, 76
clock offset
panel
set, 89
rear
Configure Option 23, 170
description, 58
DST/Summertime
panels
activate, 80
drawing
return settings, 80
front, 5
start time, 80
rear, 8
stop time, 80
front, 5
enable front panel, 81
rear, 5
Event
password, configure, 210
channel time, 75
position
return deviation, 76
edit, 54
Event number, 75
position display modes, 98
datum, 98 front panel, disable control panel, 81
power supply Local Offset, 81
voltage, 22 lock setup keys, 81
programmable pulse Opt28
description, 61 commands, 185
pulse width, 61 Option 28
return System status, 186
rack mount return time, freq, dev, UTC, 189
mounting instructions, 2 set deviation, 188
rear panel, see panel, rear set phase calibration, 188
RG-11 set System time as Local, 186
cable, 24 set System time as UTC, 186
crimp tool, 24 set voltage correction, 189
ROM date, ii start Broadcast ASCII, 188
258 INDEX

start Broadcast Vorne, 186 Setup menu list, 33

system frequency, 185 signal
system frequency deviation, 185 output
system phase, 185 description, 59
system time, 185 SNMP, 232
system time deviation, 185 configuration reference, 233
out-of-lock alarm configuring traps, 233
set time, 89 enabling, 233
Prog Pulse mib object definitions, 243
pulse polarity, 88 mib table, 234
set pulse width, 87 mib table info, 232
set time mark, 88 service, 232
Pulse Per Hour, 87 traps or notifications, 233
Return version info, 232
display buffer, 89 SNTP, see NTP Server
elevation, 83 SSH console, 222
firmware version, 89 configure https, 223
IP/MAC address, 91 configure network settings, 226
latitude, 84 configure ntp, 229
local date, 86 configure password, 224
local time, 86 configure ptp, 228
longitude, 84 configure snmp, 227
UTC date, 86 configure system, 223
UTC time, 86 configure timeouts, 224
Seconds per Pulse, 87 enable vlan, 226
Set deviation operation, 75, 76 GPS status, time quality, 227
set elevation, 83 network settings, 225
Set event operation, 76 ntp authentication, 230
set IEEE 1344 mode, 82 ntp status, 228
set latitude, 83 ntp support info, 231
set local time, 82 ntp terminology, 229
set longitude, 83 ptp status, 227
set receiver time, 86 snmp status, 227
Set recorder channel, 76 startup page, 222
set UTC time, 82 system reboot, 224
system update, 224
Status
useful keys, 223
clock, 77
startup sequence, 93
receiver, 77
Statement of Compliance, 253
status of event/deviation, 77
status display indication, 95
survey, 78
support
system, 79
request, iii
time quality, 79
surge arrester, 22, 105
survey mode, 85
synchronizing
serial port
multiple devices on one port, 62
output symbols, 70
pin definitions, 91, 103 time display modes, 96
INDEX 259

time zone format strings, 245

timing outputs
description, 58
intro, 57
title page, v

unpacking the clock, 1

version
manual, v

warranty, iii
web interface, 206
configure network settings, 212
configure ntp, 219
configure password, 210
configure ptp, 216
configure snmp, 214
configure vlan, 212
GPS status, time quality, 213
IP address, 207
logging in, 206
network settings, 211
ntp authentication, 220
ntp status, 218
ntp terminology, 218
Option 34 support information, 220
ptp status, 215
snmp status, 213
startup page, 207
system configuration, 208
system configure https, 209
system reboot, 211
system update, 210